Skip to main content

Full text of "Life On Other Worlds"

See other formats


TIGHT BINDING BOOK 



JNIVERSAI 
LIBRARY 


CD ^ 

OU 1 58982 >m 

<$ 



OSMANIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARY 
Call No^-WiV / 7J- Accession No. 
Author 
TitJe 

This book slip$b$.; Be returned grf&ft 1 before the date 
last marked 




LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 



WORLDS WITHOUT END 

BY 
THE ASTRONOMER ROYAL 

" His charmingly lucid book." 

H. O. WELLS 

"A coherent survey, concisely and 
precisely made, of all that any intelli- 
gent reader should wish to know." 

SIR RICHARD GREGORY 

" Written with singular clearness, it 
gives a most admirably balanced 
popular survey of current astronom- 
ical knowledge and speculation." 

THE BISHOP OF BIRMINGHAM 

Published by THE ENGLISH UNIVERSITIES 

PRESS at 55. net, and in the HODDER 

AND STOUGHTON Black Jacket series at 

2J. fid. net 



LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 



BY 

H. SPENCERJQNES.. 

M.A., Sc.D., F.R.S. 

ASTRONOMER ROYAL 
HONORARY FELLOW, JESUS COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE 




THE ENGLISH UNIVERSITIES PRESS LTD. 

LONDON 



FIRST PRINTED . . July 194 
REPRINTED . . November 194 



Printed in Great Britain by 
Hazell, Watson & Viney, Ltd., London and Aylesbury. 



PREFACE 

IN his Preface to La Pluralite des Mondes, Bernard 
de Fontenelle (1657-1757) wrote: 

" I have chosen that part of Philosophy which is 
most like to excite curiosity; for what can more 
concern us, than to know how this world which we 
inhabit, is made; and whether there be any other 
worlds like it, which are also inhabited as this is ? 
They who have any thoughts to lose, may throw 
them away upon such subjects as this; but I suppose 
they who can spend their time better, will not be at 
so vain and fruitless an expence." (John GlanvilPs 
translation of 1688.) 

The question whether life exists on other worlds is 
Che that still excites curiosity, and to which astrono- 
mers are expected to give an answer. In this book I 
have summarised the evidence, provided by present- 
day astronomy, which has a bearing on this ques- 
tion, and have attempted to give an answer. I do 
not expect that every reader will agree with the 
conclusions that I have reached; it is open to each 
reader to form his own conclusions, provided that 
they do not conflict with the evidence derived from 
the astronomical observations. 

The most serious- difficulty in discussing whether 
there is life on other worlds is, naturally, our 
ignorance of how life originated on the Earth. I 
have assumed that wherever in the Universe con- 
ditions are suitable for life to exist, life will somehow 
come into existence. The fact that there is pretty 



VI PREFACE 

conclusive evidence of the presence of vegetation on 
Mars, the only world where from a priori considera- 
tions we are able to conclude that conditions are 
suitable for the existence of life, lends some support 
to this assumption. There are those who will not 
consider this assumption to be justifiable and others 
who may regard it as opposed to religion. For the 
latter, I will quote again from de Fontenelle : 

" There remains no more to be said . . . but to a 
sort of People who perhaps will not be easily 
satisfy'd; not but that I have good reasons to give 
5 em, but because the best that can be given, will 
not content 'em; they are those scrupulous Persons, 
who imagine, that the placing Inhabitants any 
where, but upon the Earth, will prove dangerous to 
Religion : I know how excessively tender some are in 
Religious Matters, and therefore I am very un- 
willing to give any offence in what I publish to 
People, whose opinion is contrary to what I main- 
tain. But Religion can receive no prejudice by 
my System, which fills our infinity of worlds with 
Inhabitants, if a little errour of the Imagination be 
but rectify'd. . . . And to think there may be more 
Worlds than one, is neither against Reason, or 
Scripture. If God glorify'd himself in making one 
World, the more Worlds he made, the greater must 
be his Glory. 55 

The first chapter presents the picture of the 
Universe provided by modern astronomy, serving 
as a background against which the problem under 
discussion may be viewed in its proper perspective. 
With the Universe constructed on so vast a scale, 
it would seem inherently improbable that our 



PREFACE Vll 

small Earth can be the only home of life. In the 
second chapter the conditions for the existence of 
life are considered. These conditions are based 
on the essential uniformity of matter throughout the 
Universe. The same atoms, subject to the same 
chemical laws, are found in the Earth and in the 
remotest star or nebula. In living matter, the 
chemistry of the carbon atom, intimately bound up 
with its peculiar property of forming in combina- 
tion with other atoms a multitude of large and 
complex molecular aggregations, is of particular 
significance. The simplest living cells are highly 
complex, and correspondingly fragile, organisations. 
The conditions for such complex molecular aggre- 
gations to be possible are very restricted. The 
question whether or not the various planets in 
the solar system comply with these conditions is 
discussed in detail in later chapters. 

But before embarking on this discussion, an out- 
line of the methods of investigation that are open 
to the astronomer is given in Chapter III. From 
purely theoretical considerations it is possible to 
infer whether a planet is likely to have an atmo- 
sphere or not and also to estimate its temperature 
within fairly narrow limits. These conclusions can 
be checked by observations. Information about the 
composition of the atmosphere of a planet can be 
obtained both from general considerations and from 
direct observations. 

The atmosphere of the Earth and its evolution is 
discussed in Chapter IV, in relation to the con- 
clusions reached in the preceding chapter. The 
presence of free oxygen in the atmosphere of the 



Vlll PREFACE 

Earth, of particular importance for the existence of 
animal life, is attributed to the widespread vegeta- 
tion over the surface of the Earth. 

The detailed discussion of the different members 
of the solar system shows a wide diversity of condi- 
tions; for the most part these conditions are such 
that the possibility of the existence of life can be 
definitely excluded. Venus appears, however, to be 
a world where life may be on the verge of coming 
into existence and Mars a world where life is in the 
sere and yellow leaf. 

Passing beyond the solar system, the question 
arises whether other stars can be expected normally 
to have systems of planets associated with them. 
In order to answer this question, the origin of the 
solar system must be explained. This has proved 
to be a difficult matter. The various theories are 
discussed in Chapter IX, and it is concluded that, if 
the distribution of the stars at the time the solar 
system was formed was very much as it is at the 
present time, such a special combination of circum- 
stances is needed to account for the solar system 
that it can be inferred that relatively few of the stars 
have families of planets. 

In the final chapter these conclusions are dis- 
cussed in relation to the picture of the Universe 
given in the first chapter. Though conditions are 
heavily weighted against suitability for the exist- 
ence of life, it is concluded that there must never- 
theless be many other worlds where the appropriate 
conditions are to be found and where therefore we 
may suppose that life in some form or other does 
actually exist. 



PREFACE IX 

I am greatly indebted to Dr. W. S. Adams, 
Director of the Mount Wilson Observatory, Cali- 
fornia; to Dr. W. H. Wright, Director of the Lick 
Observatory, Mount Hamilton, California; and to 
Dr. V. M. Slipher, Director of the Lowell Observa- 
tory, Flagstaff, Arizona, for permission to reproduce 
photographs taken at these observatories and for 
kindly supplying photographs for this purpose. I 
am also indebted to the Rev. T. E. R. Phillips for 
permission to reproduce two of his excellent series of 
drawings of the planet Jupiter. 

H. SPENCER JONES. 



CONTENTS 

CHAP. PAGE 

PREFACE ...... V 

I. A PICTURE OF THE UNIVERSE . . I 

II. THE CONDITIONS FOR THE EXISTENCE OF 

LIFE . . . . . .21 

HI. METHODS OF INVESTIGATION . . 53 

IV. THE EVOLUTION OF THE ATMOSPHERE OF 

THE EARTH ..... 78 

V. WORLDS WITHOUT ATMOSPHERES . IO2 
VI. THE GIANT PLANETS . . . .122 

VH. VENUS THE EARTH'S TWIN SISTER . 152 

Vin. MARS THE PLANET OF SPENT LIFE . 172 

IX. THE ORIGIN OF THE SOLAR SYSTEM . 212 

X. BEYOND THE SOLAR SYSTEM . . 244 



LIST OF PLATES 

PLATE FACING PAGE 

1. STAR CLOUD IN THE CONSTELLATION OF 

SAGITTARIUS (THE ARCHER) . . xlv 

2. THE GREAT NEBULA IN ORION . . 1 6 

3. THE MILKY WAY NEAR THE STAR RHO 

OPHIUCHI . . . . .17 

4. THE MOON! THE APENNINES AND ARCHI- 

MEDES ...... 32 

5. THE MOON! REGION OF TYCHO AND 

CLAVIUS ...... 33 

6. THE MOON: REGION OF COPERNICUS . 80 

7. THE PLANET JUPITER . . 8 1 

8. THE PLANET SATURN .... 96 

9. THE SPECTRA OF THE MAJOR PLANETS . 97 

10. SPECTRA OF THE PLANETS . . .144 

11. CLOUDS ON THE PLANET VENUS . .145 

12. PHOTOGRAPHS OF MARS AND OF TER- 

RESTRIAL LANDSCAPE . . l6o 

13. CLOUDS ON THE PLANET MARS . . l6l 

14. THE PLANET MARS .... 2O8 

15. THE SPIRAL NEBULA 5 MESSIER IOI, IN THE 

CONSTELLATION OF THE GREAT BEAR . 2OQ 

1 6. SPIRAL NEBULA IN THE CONSTELLATION OF 

BERENICE'S HAIR . . . .224 

17. SPIRAL NEBULA, MESSIER 8 1, IN THE CON- 

STELLATION OF THE GREAT BEAR . 225 



PLATE i 

STAR CLOUD IN THE CONSTELLATION OF 
SAGITTARIUS (THE ARCHER) 

The photograph shows a part of the brightest region 
of the Milky Way. The denser parts of the cloud are 
formed by a continuous background of faint stars, 
which are so numerous that their images blend together. 
There are numerous dark lanes and channels visible 
over the cloud, caused by patches of obscuring dust. 

The centre of the Milky Way is in the direction of 
Sagittarius, so that we are here looking through our 
stellar universe to its greatest depths. It is for this 
reason that the density of the stars seen in this region 
is so great. 

The distance of the centre of th$ Milky Way system 
from the Sun is about 30,600 l$ght?years, or 180,000 
million million miles. 

Photograph taken by Mr. Franklin Adams. 



CHAPTER I 



A PICTURE OF THE 
UNIVERSE 

THE investigation of the structure of the universe 
may be said to commence with the work of William 
Herschel (1738-1822). By profession a musician, 
Herschel came to England from Hanover at the age 
of nineteen to improve his fortunes. He earned his 
living by playing the organ and teaching music, and 
in 1766 was appointed organist of the Octagon 
Chapel, Bath. But all his spare time was occupied 
with the study of pptics and astronomy, in which he 
became more and more interested. Merely to 
learn about astronomy from books was not sufficient 
for his eager inquiring mind. He longed to study 
the heavens through a telescope with his own eyes. 
Being unable to afford to buy a telescope, he 
decided to attempt to -make one for himself. 

Starting in a modest way, Herschel proceeded to 
larger and larger telescopes. It was not long before 
he became better at making telescopes than anyone 
had been before and, what is more, he showed extra- 
ordinary skill in using them. To quote his own 
words: " Seeing is in some respects an art, which 
must be learnt. 5 ' It was the excellent optical qual- 
ity of his telescopes, combined with his keenness of 
vision, that enabled him to make the discovery that 
brought him fame. On March 1 3th, 1781, he 
noticed what he described, in his journal as a 
" curious either nebulous star or perhaps a comet, 5 ' 



2 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

an object Showing a small round disk, differing in 
appearance from the point-like image of a star. 
This object proved to be a new planet, now known 
as Uranus ; it was the first planet ever to have been 
discovered by man, for the other planets known at 
that time are easily visible to the naked eye and had 
been known from remote antiquity. The distance 
of Uranus from the Sun is twice the distance of 
Saturn, the remotest of the planets known before 
HerschePs discovery, so that the discovery doubled 
the extent of the solar system. It was natural that 
it should cause a great deal of interest and excite- 
ment; one outcome of it was that the King, George 
III, created for Herschel the post of King's Astron- 
omer, with a salary of 200 a year. This enabled 
him to give up his musical career for good and all in 
favour of astronomy. 

Free to devote himself entirely to the pursuit of 
astronomy and the making of telescopes, Herschel 
set before himself the arduous and gigantic task of 
making a regular and systematic survey of the 
entire heavens. He examined each object that 
came into the field of his telescope and noted any 
peculiarities about it. He found that the Milky 
Way, the belt of diffuse whitish light that encircles 
the heavens, was composed of a vast number of faint 
stars. By counting the number of stars visible in 
the field of his telescope in different parts of the sky, 
he gauged the depths of the stellar universe. From 
these investigations he came to the conclusion that 
the universe was an extensive flattened system, 
shaped very much like a grindstone. He believed 
that the Sun was somewhere near the centre of this 



A PICTURE OF THE UNIVERSE 3 

system. The appearance of the Milky Way was the 
result of looking through the system, from a central 
position, in the directions of its greatest extension. 

In the course of his systematic survey, William 
Herschel discovered no fewer than 2,500 nebulae and 
star clusters. The nebulae were cloud-like objects, 
shining with a diffuse light, and he was inclined at 
first to believe that they were really composed of a 
multitude of stars so distant that his telescope could 
not resolve them into separate points of light, just as 
the naked eye is unable to resolve the Milky Way 
into discrete stars. But gradually he became con- 
vinced that many of them were not aggregations of 
stars, but masses of glowing gas. This conclusion 
was confirmed forty-two years after his death, when 
their light was analysed with the spectroscope and 
found to show the characteristics of the light from a 
glowing gas. 

At the same time he did not believe that all the 
nebulae were gaseous. He was convinced that some 
of them were composed of a multitude of stars and 
he regarded these as island universes, comparable in 
size with our own stellar universe. He said on one 
occasion: " I have looked farther into space than 
ever human being did before me. I have observed 
stars of which the light, it can be proved, must take 
two million years to reach the earth a " This was a 
remarkable statement to make at a time when the 
distance of not a single star was known. 

These investigations and conclusions of William 
Herschel have been summarised at some length 
because they provided for the first time a picture of 
the universe based on a systematic detailed survey 



4 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

of the sky. Subsequent investigation has confirmed 
in its essentials the picture painted by Herschel. 
Many details have been added and a few of his con- 
clusions have been modified. Not without reason 
has he been called the father of modern astronomy 
and well merited were the words in his epitaph: 
" Coelorum perrupit claustra." He broke through 
the barriers of the heavens. 

It was not until 1835, thirteen years after Her- 
scheFs death, that the distance of a star was 
measured for the first time. The principle of the 
method is simple enough; it is essentially the same 
as that employed by the surveyor to measure dis- 
tances on the Earth's surface. The object whose 
distance is required is observed from the two ends of 
a base-line of known length, the observations giving 
the angle between the directions from the object to 
the two ends of the base-line. The difficulty of 
measuring star distances arises from the fact that 
the longest base-line available for the purpose is very 
short compared with the distances of the stars. By 
making the observations when the Earth is at the 
two ends of its orbit, a base-line of about 186,000,000 
miles is obtained. No longer base-line is possible. 
To appreciate the problem that faces the surveyor 
of the skies, let us represent this base-line of 
186,000,000 miles by a line two inches long; the 
distance of the nearest star on the same scale is then 
about four miles. We have to measure, in effect, 
the distance of an object four miles away by making 
observations from two points only two inches apart! 
Still more difficult is it when, from the same two 
points, we have to measure distances of ten, a 



A PICTURE OF THE UNIVERSE 5 

hundred or a thousand miles. Success has been 
attained by careful attention to detail and by pre- 
cautions to eliminate as far as possible every source 
of error. 

It is convenient to express star distances in terms 
of the time that light takes to travel. Light travels 
with a speed of 186,000 miles a second, so that in 
the course of a year it will travel a distance of nearly 
six million million miles. Thus, for instance, in- 
stead of saying that the nearest star is 25 million 
million miles away, we may say that it is about 
four light-years away. This mode of expressing the 
distance has the additional interest of reminding us 
that we see the star, not where it is at the moment, 
but where it was four years previously. 

There is a limit to the distances that can be 
determined by direct measurement. For distances 
greater than about 500 light-years, the results be- 
come rather uncertain. If space is to be explored to 
greater distances, it must be by indirect methods. 
Such a method, which is of very great power, has 
been discovered, and the knowledge that has been 
obtained within the last two decades about the 
structure of the universe has been acquired in a very 
large measure by the application of this method. 
It is based on the special properties of a particular 
class of stars. These stars do not shine with a steady 
constant light; their light waxes and wanes in a per- 
fectly regular manner. It has been found that the 
fluctuations in the brightness or candle-power of 
such a star are accompanied by regular pulsations 
of the whole star; the star swells up and contracts 
with perfect regularity. The time required for a 



O LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

single pulsation to be completed, though constant 
for any one star, ranges for different stars from 
several hours to about thirty days ; if the pulsating 
stars are arranged in the order of the time of a single 
pulsation, it is found that they have also been 
arranged in the order of their candle-power. There 
is, in fact, a definite relationship between the period 
of pulsation and the candle-power of the star, so that, 
if the period is known, the candle-power can be 
inferred. 

There is no great difficulty in finding the time 
taken by a pulsating star in going through one 
complete cycle of light-variation; we determine this 
time, and infer the candle-power, or intrinsic bright- 
ness, of the star. We can also measure the apparent 
brightness of the star, the brightness as seen by the 
eye. The apparent brightness depends on two 
quantities the intrinsic brightness and the dis- 
tance. If we were to remove a star to twice its 
present distance, it would appear only one-quarter 
as bright as before. When both the intrinsic and 
apparent brightness are known, the distance can 
easily be inferred. 

The longer the period of pulsation, the greater is 
the candle-power of the star. Thus, for instance, 
if one pulsation is completed in two days, the candle- 
power is 260 times that of the Sun; if completed in 
ten days, the candle-power is 1,700 times that of the 
Sun; and if completed in thirty-six days, the candle- 
power is 9,600 times that of the Sun. It will be 
noticed that the candle-power in each of these 
examples is very much greater than that of the Sun. 
The pulsating stars are all, fortunately, intrinsically 



A PICTURE OF THE UNIVERSE 7 

very bright; they are included in the class of stars 
called giant stars. Their great luminosity makes it 
possible to see them far away across the vast reaches 
of space, where mediocre stars like the Sun would be 
lost to view. It is this fact that renders them so 
useful in the exploration of space to great distances. 
For example, suppose we discover in a remote star- 
cloud that there is one of these pulsating stars whose 
pulsation is completed in thirty-six days and sup- 
pose that this star appears as a star of the eleventh 
magnitude (or about one-hundredth of the bright- 
ness of the faintest star visible to the unaided eye). 
Such a star would be easily visible in a six-inch 
telescope. Because the pulsation takes thirty-six 
days, we know that the candle-power of the star is 
9,600 times the candle-power of the Sun. Because 
it appears as a star of the eleventh magnitude, we 
can infer that its distance must be 50,000 light- 
years. When we recall that the limiting distance 
that can be determined with any approach to 
accuracy by direct measurement is about 500 
light-years, it will be realised what a powerful 
method for the exploration of space is provided by 
the pulsating stars. 

The general principles that underlie the determi- 
nation of great distances having been briefly de- 
scribed, the intervening steps can be passed over 
and we can proceed to summarise the information 
that has been derived about tllfc stellar universe in 
which we find ourselves. 

The general picture drawn by Herschel, of a vast 
flattened system, shaped like a grindstone or a thin 
pocket watch, is confirmed in its essentials, but we 



8 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

now have a far more precise idea of the size and 
structure of the system. The plane of the Milky 
Way marks the direction of greatest extent of the 
system, and it is for this reason, as Herschel realised, 
that the stars are most numerous in the Milky Way 
regions. The Milky Way is not uniform in bright- 
ness, nor is the distribution of the stars in the Milky 
Way uniform. They tend to cluster into aggrega- 
tions or star-clouds. The brightest region of the 
Milky Way, containing the densest aggregation of 
stars, is in the constellation of Sagittarius in the 
southern sky. 

Herschel believed that the Sun was near the 
centre of the system. We now know that in this 
conclusion he was mistaken and that the Sun occu- 
pies a position far out from the centre of the system, 
though near its median plane. In other words, the 
Sun is a star in one of the Milky Way star-clouds. 
The centre of the system, as seen from the Sun, is in 
the direction of the Sagittarius star-clouds, and it 
is because in this direction we are looking through 
the system to its greatest depths that the density of 
the stars appears so great. A photograph of a 
portion of this region of the Milky Way is repro- 
duced in the Frontispiece. 

In addition to the stars there are also the nebulae, 
rarefied clouds of luminous gas, which are found 
only in or near the Milky Way. One of the most 
beautiful of these is the Great Nebula in Orion, 
shown in Plate 2, which is visible to the naked eye 
as a hazy diffuse patch of light. The nebulae are' 
not self-luminous; they do not shine by any light of 
their own. We see them only by virtue of the stars 



A PICTURE OF THE UNIVERSE 9 

embedded in them; the atoms in the nebulae absorb 
the light from the stars and re-emit it in radiations 
of different wave-lengths. Associated with these 
bright nebulae there are also to be found dark 
nebulae or obscuring clouds. In the midst of some 
of the densest star-clouds of the Milky Way there can 
be seen blank spaces, completely or almost com- 
pletely devoid of stars. A good example of a blank 
space is shown in Plate 3. Hundreds of such blank 
patches are known. They cannot be vacant lanes 
or channels through the stars, for it is beyond reason 
to suppose that hundreds of such channels, extend- 
ing to immense distances, could point directly to 
the Earth. The blank patches are caused by 
opaque clouds that lie between us and the stars, 
which they obscure from our sight. The opaque- 
ness of these clouds is due to the presence of ex- 
tremely fine dust. Small dust particles, of a size 
comparable with the wave-length of light, have a 
very great obscuring power, and if the average 
amount of dust in the cloud is only one fifty- 
thousandth of an ounce in each square inch of 
cross-section, the cloud will be completely 
opaque, whatever its thickness may be. 

Though the luminous nebulae and the opaque 
clouds may each occur separately, it is more usual 
to find the two in close association. It seems that 
gaseous matter and the larger dust particles are ex- 
tensively spread throughout the Milky Way regions; 
where the gaseous matter predominates we see 
bright nebulosity and, where the dust clouds pre- 
dominate, the stars that lie behind are hidden. 
Over a great portion of its extent the Milky Way is 



IO LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

divided into two branches; this effect is caused by 
the existence in the central regions of the Milky 
Way of obscuring clouds of very great extent. 
Because the dusty matter is so widespread, we can 
never hope to see to the bounds of the Milky Way. 
The gaseous matter of the luminous nebulae and 
the dusty matter of the opaque nebulae can be 
thought of as the residuum of the diffuse gaseous 
matter of which our stellar universe formerly con- 
sisted. This matter has to a large extent been 
condensed into stars ; the stars are continually 
gathering in, by their gravitational attraction, 
matter from the space surrounding them. They 
are gradually sweeping space clean, but the sweep- 
ers are few in comparison with the vast regions that 
have to be swept, so that the process is yet far from 
completion. There are reasons for believing that 
the total matter not yet condensed into stars is 
about equal in amount to that contained in all 
the stars. 

The pulsating stars have provided the key by 
means of which the dimensions of our stellar 
universe have been determined. It is found that 
its diameter is about one hundred thousand light- 
years and the distance from the Sun to the centre 
of the system is about thirty thousand light-years; 
the Sun is near the centre of a local clustering of 
stars, or a star-cloud. The motions of the stars 
have shown that the system is slowly rotating, 
under its gravitational attraction. Such a system, 
consisting of discrete stars and scattered matter, 
does not rotate as a solid body. When a solid body 
is in rotation, the motion is more rapid the greater 



A PICTURE OF THE UNIVERSE II 

the distance from the centre of rotation; a point on 
the rim of a rotating wheel, for instance, moves 
more quickly than a point on the hub. But in the 
heavens the rule is exactly the opposite ; the nearer 
to the centre of the rotation, the more rapid is the 
motion. This can be illustrated by the planets in 
the solar system; the planet nearest the Sun, 
Mercury, is moving with a speed of thirty miles a 
second; the Earth is moving with a speed of eighteen 
miles a second; Neptune is moving with a speed of 
only three miles a second. 

When the movements of the stars are analysed by 
statistical methods, it appears that the stars in a 
certain direction have the most rapid motion on 
the average, and those in the diametrically opposite 
direction have the least rapid motion; it is also 
found that the direction in which the stars have the 
most rapid motion is the direction to the centre of 
the system. These results provide certain evidence 
of rotation. But we can learn much more. We 
can obtain an estimate of the total amount of 
matter in the system, because it is the gravitational 
attraction of this matter that controls the rotation. 
It is found in this way that the system as a whole 
has a mass about 160,000 million times the mass of 
the Sun. In this is included the masses of all the 
stars, including any stars that may have ceased to 
shine as well as the mass of all the diffused matter 
scattered throughout the system. It is not possible 
to say how many stars there are in the system, but 
100,000 million may be taken as a rough estimate, 
indicating the great scale on which the system is 
built. The time taken by the Sun to make one 



12 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

complete revolution round the centre is about 225 
million years ; the stars in the neighbourhood of the 
Sun have .an average speed of about 1 70 miles a 
second. Each star has, in addition, its own peculiar 
motion relative to the group; the motion of the Sun, 
for instance, relative to the surrounding stars is 
about thirteen miles a second. 

In photographs of the Milky Way star-clouds, the 
stars appear to be so closely crowded together that 
it would seem that frequent collisions between them 
must occur. This appearance is quite deceptive, 
however. The stars are so far apart that our stellar 
universe as a whole is comparatively empty. We 
have seen that the nearest star is 25 million million 
miles away, and it is therefore clear that the neigh- 
bourhood of the Sun is pretty free from stars. It 
might be thought that the Sun is perhaps in a 
particularly empty part of the system, but this is not 
so. The density of stars around the Sun is fairly 
representative of the system as a whole, except per- 
haps in the regions close to the centre. Jeans has 
calculated that an actual collision between two stars 
can occur on the average only once in 600,000 
billion years. This is much greater than the age of 
the stars, so that we may say that to all intents and 
purposes collisions between two stars never occur. 

If we were to travel with the speed of light 
through our stellar universe, in the direction away 
from its centre, we should find after some thousands 
of years that the stars were becoming less numerous. 
Some time later we should find only a few scattered 
outlying members of the system, and at last we 
should leave these behind and find ourselves in outer 



A PICTURE OF THE UNIVERSE 13 

space, free from stars. If we continued to travel 
on, should we come to other stellar universes, or is 
our Milky Way system the one and only universe ? 
We have seen that William Herschel was convinced 
that some of the nebulae that he observed were 
island universes, at such great distances that his 
telescopes could not resolve them into discrete stars. 
The analysis with the spectroscope of the light from 
such nebulas lends confirmation to HerschePs 
views, for the light from these nebulae does not show 
the characteristics of the light from a glowing gas, 
but is more like the light from the stars. 

The nebulae in question are generally called spiral 
nebulae, because when seen broadside on they show 
a characteristic spiral structure. The typical spiral 
nebula has a bright nucleus from which, at diamet- 
rically opposite points, two arms emerge and curl 
round in the form of a spiral. Such nebulae are to 
be found at all angles to the line of sight; some are 
seen obliquely, when the spiral structure may per- 
haps be traceable, though not so clearly shown as in 
those that are seen broadside on. Others are seen 
edgewise on, and then the spiral structure is not 
evident; but such nebulae appear exactly like what 
we have found our own universe to be a flattened 
disk-like system. There is an essential continuity 
from the nebulae seen broadside-on to those seen 
edgewise-on, and we can infer that these latter mutft 
also possess the spiral structure. Photographs of 
spiral nebulae seen broadside on, inclined to the line 
of sight, and edgewise, are reproduced in Plates 15, 
1 6 and 17 respectively. 

For a hundred yea^s after HerschePs death the 



14 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

question whether the spiral nebulae were island 
universes outside our own universe continued to be 
debated. It has been onlpwithin recent years that 
the question has been finally settled. The key to 
the whole question was to find the distances of these 
nebulae, because if their distances were known we 
would at once know whether they were inside or 
outside our stellar system ; we would also know their 
size and would be able to decide whether they were 
at all comparable in size with our own system. 

The problem was solved when it was found that 
within some of these nebulae there were stars which 
showed all the characteristics of the pulsating stars. 
The nebulae in which these stars were found were 
those of largest apparent size and therefore presum- 
ably the nearest to us. Their periods of pulsation 
were determined and their distances were inferred. 
They were found to be of the order of a million light- 
years. This was conclusive evidence that the spiral 
nebulae were outside our stellar universe and that 
they were, in fact, island universes. The close 
agreement between the distances of the nearer 
external universes and the estimate of distance given 
by Herschel (two million light-years) may be noted. 

The size of these other universes proves to be of the 
same general order as that of our own universe. It 
is found also that they are, like our universe, in slow 
rotation; they may be thought of as gigantic celestial 
Catherine wheels, spinning round, with their vast 
spiral arms. They seem also to contain about the 
same amount of matter as our own system. The 
nearest of the external universes can be studied in 
some detail with the aid of the modern powerful 



A PICTURE OF THE UNIVERSE 15 

telescopes. The typical features of our own system 
are shown by them aggregations of stars into star- 
clouds, bright gaseous nebulosity and opaque dust 
clouds. The obscuring dust clouds are found to be 
extensively scattered throughout the central plane 
of each system, as they are in the region of the Milky 
Way. 

These external universes are of all grades of 
apparent size from the nearest, which have an 
angular diameter of a few degrees, to very remote 
systems, whose images on the photographic plate 
are scarcely distinguishable from the images of 
stars. If we make the assumption that the universes 
are all of much about the same size, we can make 
rough estimates of their distances. These estimates 
have served to establish a remarkable fact, which 
can in turn be used to provide a much more certain 
determination of the distances. The velocity of 
each system directly towards us or directly away 
from us can be measured; the principle used for 
this purpose is that if a body, which is sending out 
radiations in the form of light, is approaching, its 
radiations are slightly compressed together so that 
their wave-lengths are slightly shorter than they 
would be if the body were at rest; if, on the other 
hand, it is moving away, the radiation that we 
receive are all of slightly longer wave-length. 

It is found that the external universes are moving 
away from us and that the more distant they are, 
the more rapid is their velocity of recession. This 
is not the place to discuss the possible interpreta- 
tions of this remarkable result. One suggestion is 
that the universes are the fragments of one large 



PLATE 2 

THE GREAT NEBULA IN ORION 

This nebula is visible to the naked eye as a hazy 
patch in Orion's dagger, below the middle of the three 
bright stars that form his belt. The bright portion 
measures about six million million miles across, but the 
extent of the fainter outer portion is fully three times as 
great. The nebula is composed of gaseous matter of 
extremely low density, about one thousand million 
millionth of that of air under ordinary conditions (much 
less than that of the most perfect artificial vacuum), yet 
because of its great extent the total amount of matter in 
the nebula has a mass about ten thousand times that of 
the Sun. The nebula glows by the light of stars em- 
bedded within it. The round white dots are images of 
stars (other Suns), the large round patch near the top 
of the photograph being the image of a bright star. 

Photograph by Messrs. Ritchey and Pease, with the 
24-inch reflector at the Yerkes Observatory, 1901, 
October 19. 



PLATE 3 

THE MILKY WAY NEAR THE STAR RHO OPHIUCHI 

The photograph depicts a portion of the Milky Way 
in the neighbourhood of the star Rho Ophiuchi, not far 
from the bright naked-eye star Antares in the constella- 
tion of the Scorpion. The background of the photo- 
graph shows images of a great number of faint stars 
faint because of their great distance and not because 
they are of intrinsically low luminosity. 

In the right-hand portion of the photograph is seen a 

sharply defined lane, almost devoid of star images. 

This appearance is caused by a cloud of obscuring* dust, 

relatively near to the Sun, which hides the distant stars. 

The few stars whose images are seen projected on the 

cloud lie between the Sun and the cloud. Other 

patches of obscuration may also be seen. 

The central region shows patches of bright nebulosity^ 

caused by glowing gas. Obscuration by clouds of dust 

and bright nebulosity are often found in the Milky Way 

regions in close association. 

Photograph by Dr. E. E. Barnard, with the lo-inch 

Bruce lens of the Mount Wilson Observatory, 1905, 

April 5. Exposure 4^ hours. 



l8 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

universe, which was originally very compact. An 
explosion occurred and the fragments were sent 
flying through space in all directions. If such were 
the case then, after the lapse of a considerable time, 
we would find that the most rapidly moving parts 
would be at the greatest distances and that, viewed 
from any one of the fragments, all the other frag- 
ments would appear to be moving away and with 
speeds that were faster the greater the distances. 
This suggested explanation may not be the true 
one, but it serves to illustrate that there may be 
a simple interpretation to facts that at first sight 
appear very strange. 

The point of interest in the present connection 
is that the close proportionality between velocity of 
recession and distance affords by far the most accur- 
ate and reliable method of estimating the distances 
of very remote systems, because the velocity in the 
line-of-sight can be estimated from the wave- 
lengths of the radiations with good accuracy. It is 
found that the velocity in miles a second divided by 
1 06 gives the distance in millions of light-years. 
Thus, for instance, a distant universe in the con- 
stellation of Bootes has been found to be receding 
with a velocity of 24,300 miles a second. We can 
infer that this nebula is at a distance of about 230 
million light-years. Such a distance is beyond the 
power of the imagination to conceive. Whilst the 
light by which this universe is seen has been 
travelling through space, the dinosaurs and flying 
reptiles have appeared on the Earth and with the 
slow march of evolution have disappeared again. 
Mountain ranges have been uplifted and then worn 



A PICTURE OF THE UNIVERSE 19 

down by erosion. The surface of the Earth has 
entirely changed its appearance. And at length, 
when the light was Hearing the end of its long 
journey, man appeared on the Earth. Such great 
distances, though they may surpass our powers of 
conception, cannot fail to impress upon us the 
vastness of space. 

The most distant systems that have been recorded 
on long-exposure photographs with the great 100- 
inch telescope are at a distance of about 500 million 
light-years. Within a sphere of this radius, it is 
estimated that there are about one hundred million 
universes, the average distance of any universe from 
its nearest neighbour being of the order of a million 
light-years. At these greatest distances to which 
space has as yet been probed, the universes seem tc 
be scattered with an approximately uniform distri- 
bution ; there is no evidence of any falling off in 
density at these extreme distances nor of any 
approach to the bounds of space. 

Such, in brief, is the picture of the universe pro- 
vided by modern astronomical observation. We 
see the Earth as a small planet, one member of a 
family of planets revolving round the Sun; the Sun, 
in turn, is an average star situated somewhat far out 
from the centre of a vast system, in which the stars 
are numbered by many thousands of millions; there 
are many millions of such systems, more or less 
similar to each other, peopling space to the farthest 
limits to which modern exploration has reached. 

Can it be that throughout the vast deeps of space 
nowhere but on our own little Earth is life to be 
found ? Can astronomy tell us whether life can 



2O LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

exist on any of the other planets belonging to the 
solar system; and if it can exist, whether it does 
exist ? Is it possible to estimate the likelihood of 
life existing somewhere in the universe outside the 
solar system ? These are some of the questions 
that I am continually being asked. In succeeding 
chapters the attempt will be made to answer these 
questions, in so far as it is possible for astronomy to 
provide answers. But first we must consider what 
life is and what tests can be used to decide whether 
life is possible or is not possible on any particular 
world. 



CHAPTER II 



THE CONDITIONS FOR 
THE EXISTENCE OF LIFE 

IN attempting to discuss whether life can exist on 
any other world, we come up against the difficulty 
that we have no certain knowledge of how life 
originated on the Earth. Suppose we could show 
that on some other world the conditions were 
essentially similar to those on the Earth. Would it 
be legitimate to assume that because life has come 
into existence on the Earth, there must necessarily 
be life also on the other world, though perhaps in 
different forms from those with which we are fami- 
liar ? If, on the other hand, we could show that the 
conditions on another world differed from those on 
the Earth to such an extent that no forms of life now 
present on the Earth could exist, would it be a 
legitimate conclusion that the other world must be 
a world devoid of life ? May we not have some 
justification for assuming that the forms of life that 
now exist on the Earth have developed, through a 
slow process of evolution, to suit those conditions 
and that, if different conditions were found to pre- 
vail elsewhere in the universe, different forms of life 
might have evolved ? It is conceivable, for instance, 
that we could have beings, the cells of whose bodies 
contained silicon, instead of the carbon which is an 
essential constituent of our cells and of all other 
living cells on the Earth ; and that, because of this 
essential difference between the constitution of these 



21 



22 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

cells and the cells of which animal and plant life 
on the Earth are built up, they might be able to 
exist at temperatures so high that no terrestrial 
types of life could survive. To obtain some guid- 
ance in endeavouring to answer such questions, we 
must consider what biology can teach us about the 
nature of life. 

All forms of matter, inorganic, organic or living 
matter, are built up of the atoms of different ele- 
ments. Ninety-two different elements are known 
tp the chemist, hydrogen being the lightest and 
uranium the heaviest. The atoms of these elements 
may be regarded as the bricks from which all matter, 
everywhere in the universe, is built up. It might 
seem at first sight surprising that the great variety of 
substances that we find on the Earth can be built 
from so limited a number of different atoms. But 
the variety is produced by the great variety of ways 
in which the different types of atoms can be com- 
bined, just as the richness of our language is the 
result of the large number of ways in which the 
twenty-six letters of the alphabet can be combined 
to form words. 

So all the innumerable substances that we find on 
the Earth or that we can think of the minerals in 
the crust, precious stones, bricks, timber, all living 
things, coal, oil and so forth are merely the result 
of different combinations of some of the ninety- two 
varieties of atoms. But these same atoms are found 
also in the Sun, in the stars the most distant as well 
as the nearest in the nebulae and in the remote 
universe, as well as in the diffuse gaseous matter and 
star-dust that is thinly scattered about space be- 



CONDITIONS FOR EXISTENCE OF LIFE 23 

tween the stars. Conversely , no element is known 
to occur in the Sun or the stars that has not been 
found on the Earth. It is true that one element was 
discovered in the Sun before it had been found on 
the Earth; that was the gaseous substance to which 
the name helium (from the Greek word for the Sun, 
yjXios) was given. Helium was subsequently dis- 
covered on the Earth in cleveite and other minerals 
containing uranium and was found to be present in 
small quantities even in the air that we breathe. 

But not merely do we find in the Sun and the 
stars the same elements that are found on the Earth, 
we find also that the elements that are the most 
abundant on the Earth are on the whole the most 
abundant in the Sun and the stars, and those that 
are least abundant on the Earth are the least 
abundant in the Sun and the stars. There are some 
exceptions, which are not without significance as we 
shall see subsequently, but on the whole the parallel- 
ism is very striking and suggests a common origin 
from some primordial matter. 

How can we detect the presence of this or that 
particular element in the Sun or in a distant star ? 
The detection is made by analysing the light with a 
spectroscope, which breaks the light up into its 
different constituents. The light reaching us from 
the Sun is highly complex; the atoms of any given 
element can vibrate in a number of different ways 
and each particular mode of vibration gives rise to 
the emission of light of one particular wave-length. 
At any instant, some of the atoms will be vibrating 
in one particular mode, others in a different mode 
and so on. The aggregate of the light radiations 



24 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

corresponding to these various vibrations of the atom 
gives what is called the spectrum of the element, a 
series of light- vibrations of definite wave-lengths or 
frequencies which is characteristic of the element in 
question and is produced by no other element. If 
this particular series of vibrations is detected when 
the light from a star is analysed , then we may con- 
clude" with absolute certainty that the element in 
question is present in the star. 

The atoms were formerly thought to be small, 
hard spheres, the smallest particles of a substance 
that could exist by themselves. If an element were 
divided into smaller and smaller particles, we 
should at length come to a stage when we could sub- 
divide no further. We should then have reached 
the individual atoms. But modern investigations 
of the structure of matter have shown that this 
picture is incomplete. The different atoms are 
themselves built up of elementary particles, called 
protons, neutrons and electrons. The proton car- 
ries a positive charge of electricity; the electron 
carries an equal negative charge; the neutron, as its 
name implies, is electrically neutral. The proton 
and the neutron have approximately the same 
mass and are much heavier than the electron. A 
fourth elementary particle, which has been called 
the positron or positive electron, has recently been 
discovered; it has the same mass as the negatively 
charged electron but a positive charge equal to 
that of the proton. The positron is not usually 
detected in the presence of matter; it is possible, 
though not certain, that the proton is merely a 
combination of a neutron and a positron, in which 



CONDITIONS FOR EXISTENCE OF LIFE 25 

case there would be three fundamental particles- 
neutrons, negative electrons and positive electrons. 
The atom as a whole is electrically neutral, so 
that the total number of protons contained in it 
is equal to the total number of negative electrons. 

The modern conception of an atom is of a system 
containing a nucleus, in which almost all the mass 
of the atom is concentrated, composed of protons 
and neutrons, whilst outside the nucleus there are 
sufficient electrons to make the atom electrically 
neutral; we may think of the electrons as describing 
orbits around the nucleus, but the system as a whole 
is much more complicated than a miniature solar 
system. In the solar system, each planet moves in 
a definite orbit around the sun; but in the atom, 
each electron can move in a number of different 
orbits and can jump from one orbit to another. 

The simplest atom is the atom of hydrogen, 
containing a nucleus of a single proton with a 
single electron outside it. It is also necessarily the 
lightest of the atoms. The next simplest atom is 
the atom of helium; the nucleus of the helium 
atom contains two protons and two neutrons and 
there are two external electrons. The weight of 
this atom is approximately four times the weight of 
the atom of hydrogen or, in other words, we say that 
helium has an atomic weight of four. So, in succes- 
sion, the atoms of the different elements can be built 
up, each containing one more external electron than 
the preceding and the atomic weight being deter- 
mined by the number of protons and neutrons in the 
nucleus. It will now be readily understood why 
the same atoms are to be found everywhere in the 



26 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

universe and why we do not find in the Sun, for 
instance, a series of atoms entirely distinct from 
those that are found on the Earth. The atoms 
throughout the universe are built up of the same 
fundamental particles, and out of these we can 
build up one and only one series of atoms, which 
increase in complexity from the lightest elements 
to the heaviest. 

The atom is something very different from the 
hard solid sphere that it was formerly believed to be. 
Yet in ordinary chemical processes the atoms of the 
different elements retain their identity. The atom 
of helium does not split up and form four atoms of 
hydrogen. The nucleus of the atom must be split 
up in order that we may succeed in transmuting 
one element into another. This requires a great 
deal of energy, much more than can be furnished 
by any chemical action ; the splitting up of atoms 
cannot be brought about, therefore, by chemical 
action. So although the various atoms are all 
built up of protons, neutrons and electrons, we may 
still for most purposes think of the atoms as they 
were pictured before the new knowledge about the 
structure of matter had been gained. 

The same atoms, with the same structure, being 
found throughout the universe, it necessarily 
follows that the chemical laws that they obey will 
be the same everywhere, because these laws are the 
result of the particular structures and their energy 
relationships. The same chemical compounds can 
exist under the same conditions anywhere in the 
universe. Thus, for instance, two atoms of hydro- 
gen and one atom of oxygen can unite to form a 



CONDITIONS FOR EXISTENCE OF LIFE 27 

stable chemical structure, a molecule of water, and 
one molecule of water is precisely similar to every 
other molecule. The molecule of a substance is 
the smallest part of the substance that can exist 
separately. We shall not find that elsewhere in the 
universe it will be necessary to have three or four 
atoms of hydrogen to combine with one atom of 
oxygen to form a stable chemical compound. This 
conclusion is of importance for our consideration of 
the possibility that living matter may take essenti- 
ally different basic forms elsewhere in the universe 
from the forms that are found on the Earth. Though 
types of vegetable or animal life that are unlike 
any types to be found on the Earth may conceiv- 
ably occur elsewhere in the universe, the chemical 
compounds of which the individual cells are made 
up must be such as could exist on the Earth 
and it is unlikely that they differ from the com- 
pounds of which living matter on the Earth is 
built up. 

A special role is played in living organisms by 
carbon, because it possesses to a far greater extent 
than any other element the power of uniting with 
itself, as well as with other elements, to build up 
single molecules containing very large numbers of 
atoms. It is these complex molecules containing 
carbon that form the basis of the structure of all 
living organisms. The only other element that 
possesses the power of building up complex mole- 
cules to any great degree is silicon, but the com- 
pound molecules which have carbon as a basis are 
far more numerous and complex than those which 
have silicon as a basis. 



28 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

Too long a digression into chemical theory would 
be necessary to explain why carbon possesses this 
unique property. But it is primarily due to the fact 
that the atom of carbon is what is called a tetra- 
valent atom. Into the formation of every molecule 
of any given chemical compound a definite number 
of atoms enter. If we consider simple compounds 
involving hydrogen, we find that one atom of cer- 
tain elements will combine with one atom of 
hydrogen; one atom of certain other elements will 
combine with two atoms of hydrogen; while one 
atom of yet other elements will combine with three 
or with four atoms of hydrogen. Thus., for in- 
stance, one atom of hydrogen will combine with 
one atom of the yellowish poison gas chlorine to 
form hydrochloric acid ; chlorine and hydrogen are 
called monovalcnt elements. Two atoms of hydro- 
gen will combine with one atom of oxygen to 
form water; oxygen is called a divalent element. 
Three atoms of hydrogen will combine with one 
atom of nitrogen to form the pungent gas am- 
monia; nitrogen is called a trivalent element. 
Four atoms of hydrogen will combine with one 
atom of carbon to form the gas methane, familiar 
to the miner as the dangerous fire-damp; carbon is 
called a tetravalent element. 

Two elements that unite with each other, one to 
one, have the same valency. Thus, for instance, 
the molecule of common salt contains one atom of 
sodium and one atom of chlorine. Chlorine is 
monovalent and, therefore, sodium must also be 
monovalent. The atom of a divalent element may 
unite with two atoms of a monovalent element, 



CONDITIONS FOR EXISTENCE OF LIFE 2Q 

with one atom of each of two monovalent elements, 
or with one atom of another divalent element. 
The molecule of caustic soda, for instance, consists 
of one atom of divalent oxygen linked on one side 
with one atom of monovalent sodium and on the 
other side with one atom of monovalent hydrogen; 
whilst the calcium oxide molecule consists of one 
atom of calcium and one atom of oxygen, and 
because oxygen is divalent so also must calcium be. 

It will be clear that complex molecules cannot 
be built up from monovalent atoms ; when two such 
atoms unite with each other there are no free 
affinities or links left over to which other atoms can 
attach themselves. The possibilities are greater but 
are still very limited when we consider divalent 
elements. The more linkages or affinities that the 
atom has, the greater are the varieties of molecules 
that can be built up. 

This statement is subject to limitation, however. 
We have not referred as yet to valencies higher than 
four. There are some elements, such as phosphorus 
and nitrogen, which are pentavalent, and it might 
be thought that these elements would have a greater 
power of building up complex molecules than car- 
bon has. Such elements, however, tend to behave 
as trivalent elements, two of the links joining 
together and cancelling each other; we saw above 
that in ammonia nitrogen behaves as though it 
were trivalent. The maximum power of uniting 
with other atoms seems to be reached with the 
tetravalent atoms and, amongst the tetravalent 
atoms, to the largest degree with carbon. The 
carbon atom can have four linkages joined up with 



30 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

other atoms, when it is said to be saturated, but it 
is possible also for two of the four to interplay with 
each other, in which case the carbon atom is said 
to be unsaturated. An example of an unsaturated 
carbon atom is provided by carbon monoxide, the 
poisonous constituent in coal gas or in the exhaust 
gases from a motor-car engine; the molecule of 
carbon monoxide contains one atom of carbon and 
one atom of oxygen. 

We will consider a few simple compounds* of 
carbon to illustrate the facility with which a variety 
of compounds can be built up. We start with 
methane or marsh-gas, and suppose the atoms of 
hydrogen are replaced one by one by atoms of 
monovalent chlorine. Methane and the four com- 
pounds that can thus be formed may be represented 
thus: 

H Cl Cl Cl 

I I I I 

H C H H C H Cl C H Cl C H 

H H H Cl 

Cl 

Cl C Cl 

Cl 

(H denotes an atom of hydrogen, C an atom of 
carbon, Cl an atom of chlorine.) 
or by the formulae 

l2> CHC1 3 , CC1 4 



CONDITIONS FOR EXISTENCE OF LIFE 31 

In the first representation, by what chemists term 
a structural formula, the relationship of the several 
atoms to one another in each molecule of the sub- 
stance is shown. The second group of formulae 
merely indicates the chemical constitution of the 
molecules, without giving any information about 
their structure. The structural formulae, giving 
an indication of the structure of the molecules, are 
much the more informative. 

The first substitution of one atom of chlorine gives 
the substance called methyl chloride. The group 
(CH 3 ), in which the carbon atom has one free link, 
behaves like a simple monovalent atom and can 
take the place of monovalent atoms in other com- 
pounds, so forming compounds of greater com- 
plexity; it is called the methyl group. The next 
compound is di-chlor-methane. By the substitu- 
tion of a further atom of chlorine we obtain tri- 
chlor-methane, which is the chemical name for the 
anaesthetic, chloroform. When all the hydrogen 
has been replaced by chlorine we obtain carbon 
tetra-chloride, an important organic solvent, parti- 
cularly of fatty or greasy substances, which has the 
advantage of not being highly inflammable. It is 
therefore used extensively in dry cleaning processes, 
being safer than inflammable solvents such as 
petrol or benzene. 

The organic substances that are built up by living 
plants and animals can be classified into three 
broad divisions, the carbohydrates, the fats and the 
proteins. We will illustrate briefly how such sub- 
stances can be built up in progressively increasing 
complexity. We start with the simplest of the 



PLATE 4 

THE MOON: THE APENNINES AND ARCHIMEDES 

The Apennine Mountains form the greatest range of 
mountains on the Moon, being nearly 640 miles in 
length and reaching a maximum height of 21,000 feet. 
They rise gradually on the S.W, side, but fall away 
steeply, with great precipices, on the N.W. (In the 
plate, North is at the top and West at the right.) 

North and east of the Apennines lies the great lunar 
plain, called Mare Imbrium, or Sea of Storms. Ripple 
marks on this plain mark the limits of successive flows 
of lava. 

In the centre of the upper portion of the photograph 
is the ring-mountain or lunar crater, known as Archi- 
medes. It is 50 miles across. The highest part of the 
mountain-ring is 7,400 feet above the interior, whose 
level is 650 feet below that of the surrounding surface. 

The two craters near the top right-hand corner are 
known as Aristillus (upper) and Autolycus (lower). 

Photographed by Dr. J. H. Moore and Mr. J. F. 
Chappell, with the 36-inch refractor, Lick Observatory, 
1937, October 26. 



PLATE 5 

THE MOON: REGION OF TYCHO AND CLAVIUS 

The photograph shows part of the southern portion of 
the Moon's surface, illustrating its extreme ruggedness. 
The whole of this region is honeycombed with craters of 
all sizes from the smallest to the largest, many craters 
being contained within, or overlapping, the walls of 
other craters. 

Immediately to the left of the centre of the photograph 
is Tycho, the most perfect specimen of a lunar crater. 
It is 54 miles wide and 17,000 feet deep, so that Mt. 
Blanc, if placed inside it, would not reach the top. 
The central peak, whose shadow can be seen on the 
floor of the crater, is 5,500 feet in height. From this 
crater extends a great ray system, which can be seen 
near full moon; some of the rays extend over thousands 
of miles, passing across mountains and valleys. 

The large crater at the bottom of the photograph is 
Glavius. It has a diameter of 142 miles. There are 
numerous small craters on and within its ring. 

Photographed by Dr. J. H. Moore and Mr. J. F. 
Chappell, with the 36-inch refractor, Lick Observatory, 
1937, October 26. 



34 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

sugars, whose basis is six carbon atoms in the form 
of a chain, with links to hydrogen and to the group 
called hydroxyl, consisting of an atom of oxygen 
and an atom of hydrogen ( O H), which in a 
similar way to the methyl group acts as a mono- 
valent atom. The diagrammatic or structural 
formula is: 

H H H H H H 

1 I I I I I 
rj n n n r; p _ Q 

\^i \~J \^t \^4 \^J \_J \ / 

I I I I I 

OH OH OH OH OH 

It may be noted in passing that groups containing 
six carbon atoms occur very frequently in carbon 
compounds and seem to possess great stability. 

A more complex sugar can be obtained by com- 
bining two such molecules. If we imagine one of 
the hydrogen atoms removed from the first molecule 
and one of the hydroxyl groups removed from the 
second, we can join up the resulting free linkage to 
form cane sugar, a disaccharide, whilst the hydroxyl 
group and the hydrogen atom, which have been set 
ifree, join up to form a molecule of water, H O H. 
This process can be repeated and, theoretically, we 
can build up in this way molecules of sugars or 
starches of any desired degree of complexity. The 
starches found in living plants contain thirty to 
forty of such groups. There should in practice 
presumably be a limit, conditioned by the energy 
relationships, beyond which further reduplication 
would not be possible, the molecules becoming 
unstable and breaking down. But the process 



CONDITIONS FOR EXISTENCE OF LIFE 35 

illustrates the adaptability of the carbon atom as the 
basis for large molecular aggregations. The sugars 
and starches, with this general type of structure, 
form the carbohydrates of living matter. 

The basic structure of fats of living cells can be 
explained by starting with glycerine ; the molecules 
of this substance consist of a chain of three carbon 
atoms in which each carbon atom is united to a 
hydrogen atom and a hydroxyl group, giving the 
structure : 

H H H 

I i I 
H C C C H 

I I I 
OH OH OH 

When each hydroxyl group is replaced by a 
molecule of a fatty acid, a fat is formed. A 
hydrogen atom from the fatty acid molecule 
combines in this process with the hydroxyl group 
to form water. 

The fatty acid is usually built up on a basis of 
chains of six carbon atoms; the following structural 
formula represents a simple fatty acid: 

H H H H H 

I I I I I 
H G C C C G G = O 

I I I I I I 
H H H H H OH 

This formula may be compared with the formula 
of the simple sugar given above. It is the group 



36 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 



on the right-hand side 

group, which confers the acid properties. 

If such a molecule combines with the glycerine 
molecule, the hydrogen of the (OH) acid group 
combines with one of the (OH) groups in the 
glycerine molecule to form water, the two free 
linkages being joined. When the three (OH) groups 
in the glycerine molecule have been replaced in 
this way by three fatty acid molecules, each of 
which loses the hydrogen atom of its acidic group, 
a fat is obtained. The fatty acids that are formed 
in nature in living cells are usually of a more 
complex nature than this, being derived from the 
union of three of the six-carbon chains, only one 
of which possesses the acid carboxyl group. There 
is then a row of eighteen carbon atoms. Three 
such complex molecules react with the glycerine 
molecules to form the large molecule of a fat. It 
will be realised that the process of carbon-chain 
building can be considerably extended with the 
formation of large and very complex molecules, 
all of which possess, however, the same general 
characteristics. 

To explain the basis of the structure of the third 
group of substances found in living matter, the 
proteins, we again start with the simple fatty acid, 
based on the six-carbon chain, whose formula was 
given above. If the hydrogen atom at the end of 

the chain is replaced by the amino group, N<^TT, 

obtained from an ammonia molecule that has lost 
one of its atoms of hydrogen, and which behaves 



CONDITIONS FOR EXISTENCE OF LIFE 37 

as a monovalent atom, a substance is obtained that 
has the formula: 

H H H H H H 

N G C C C C C = O 

I ! I I I I I 

H H H H H H OH 

(N denotes an atom of nitrogen) 

Such a substance is one of a large group of 
substances that are called amino acids. It will be 
noted that it contains at one end the carboxyl 
group, which confers acid properties, whilst 
at the other end it contains the amino group, 
which confers alkaline or basic properties. It 
may be mentioned that ammonia, from which 
the amino group is derived, is a strong base. The 
amino acids are, therefore, acid in one part and basic 
in another and according to the circumstances they 
can act either as an acid or as a base. The amino 
acids form the basis of all the proteins. Many of 
these have an extremely complex structure, with 
molecular weights running into many thousands. 
The acid portion of one amino acid has a chemical 
attraction for the basic portion of another and this 
enables them to unite to form a more complex 
amino acid. The hydrogen atoms may be replaced 
by many diverse groups, of a more or less com- 
plicated nature, without affecting the characteristic 
amino-acid properties. There may be two amino 
groups instead of one, forming a di-amino acid; 
sometimes also there are two acid groups. The 
peculiar property of the carbon atom of forming 



38 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

chains makes possible a vast number of different 
combinations, with the result that an almost infinite 
variety of structures can be obtained from the four 
elements hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen and oxygen. 

An important process in nature is the building 
up of carbohydrate into fat in living structures ; the 
process is important because the fat provides a 
larger store of energy. The energy that is stored 
in this way is derived from sunlight. Reference to 
the structural formulae given above shows that the 
carbohydrates contain the repeated structure 

H H 

I . I 

C , whilst the fats contain the repeated C 

| structure .... | 

OH H 

The action of sunlight is to split up one of the OH 
groups in the carbohydrate and to replace it by a 
hydrogen atom, the oxygen being given off in the 
process and energy from the sunlight being utilised. 
This is essentially the process that the chemist calls 
reduction. It can be reversed; the organic sub- 
stance then becomes oxidised and energy is released, 
which is available for vital processes. 

We have seen that the large molecules built up 
around long chains of carbon atoms form the basis 
of living matter. A further stage of complexity is 
produced by the tendency for a number of these 
large molecules to unite to form molecular aggre- 
gations. In such molecular unions, each molecule 
behaves as a single atom. 

The separate molecules in the aggregation are 
feebly held together without true atomic union; 



CONDITIONS FOR EXISTENCE OF LIFE 39 

very little evolution of energy is involved in the 
formation of such aggregations, which are in a 
somewhat unstable condition. They exist in a state 
of delicate balance. This is the distinguishing 
feature of the state of matter that is termed the 
colloidal state. The study of matter in this state has 
become an important branch of chemistry. It has 
proved of particular significance in biochemistry 
the chemistry of living matter because much of 
the material of which living cells are constructed 
exists in this state. The colloidal substances may 
be either active in solution, or they may be inactive 
masses which have been formed from the dissolved 
living colloids and thrown out of solution. The 
latter process gives rise to the membranes that sur- 
round the separate cells and divide one from 
another. It may be illustrated by the formation of 
a skin on the surface of warm milk. The chief 
colloid of the milk accumulates on the surface and 
the molecular aggregations join together to form a 
close network or film. 

To consider the special properties of matter in 
the colloidal state and to discuss the reasons why 
the colloidal state plays so large a part in vital 
processes would be outside the scope of this book. 
The important point to emphasise for our present 
purpose is the tendency for the occurrence in living 
matter of large molecular units in a state of a 
delicate balance of equilibrium. 

The preceding discussion may be summed up as 
follows: the same atoms that occur on the Earth 
are to be found in the remotest parts of the Universe. 
The same chemical laws necessarily prevail through- 



40 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

out the Universe. The great variety of substances 
that are necessary to form living matter is made 
possible by the peculiar power of the carbon atom 
of uniting with other atoms. The chemistry of 
carbon is, therefore, of great importance in the study 
of living matter and wherever in the Universe 
living matter may occur it must be dependent upon 
the special properties of the carbon atoms. The 
formation of large molecules with a chainlike 
structure and of feebly stable molecular groups 
must be possible, it would seem, if living matter 
is to exist. 

These conclusions can serve as a guide in con- 
sidering the conditions that are necessary for the 
existence of life to be possible. The first requisite 
is that the temperature should be neither too high 
nor too low. Every chemical compound can be 
split up or dissociated by raising its temperature 
sufficiently. The ease with which various sub- 
stances can be broken up by heating differs con- 
siderably. In the hottest stars no compounds at 
all can be detected; matter can exist only in the 
atomic state. In the Sun, whose temperature is 
about 6,000 C., a few very simple compounds 
that strongly resist dissociation are found, such as 
silicon fluoride and cyanogen. The temperature of 
sunspots is about a thousand degrees lower than the 
temperature of the rest of the Sun and this lower 
temperature enables other simple compounds to be 
present in the spots, which cannot exist at the higher 
temperature of the rest of the Sun; amongst such 
compounds are titanium oxide, boron oxide and 
the hydrides of magnesium and calcium. For the 



CONDITIONS FOR EXISTENCE OF LIFE 41 

cool red stars, with temperatures of the ordef of 
3,000 G., bands due to compounds become more 
prominent in the 'spectra; but the compounds are 
simple compounds, titanium and zirconium oxides, 
cyanogen and a few other simple carbon compounds. 
In general, the more complex the structure of the 
molecules of a substance, the more readily they are 
broken up when the temperature is raised. We 
have seen that the molecules of which living mattes 
is composed are extremely complex. For this 
reason they are also very fragile and have but small 
power to withstand being broken up when the 
temperature is increased. All forms of life that we 
know are, in fact, very sensitive to high temperature. 
The surest way to kill any form of life is to subject 
it to a high temperature. For this reason milk is 
sterilised by the process of pasteurisation; no milk 
can be sold as pasteurised unless it has been main- 
tained at a temperature between 145 F. and 150 
F. for not less than 30 minutes. It is found that 
this treatment ensures the destruction of any 
disease-producing organisms, such as the tuber- 
culosis bacilli, which may be present in the milk. 
For the same reasons, water of doubtful purity can 
be 'made safe for drinking by being well boiled. 
Bearing in mind that living matter, wherever it may 
occur in the Universe, must be complex in structure, 
we may reasonably conclude that wherever tem- 
peratures are sufficiently high to destroy any form 
of life that occurs on the Earth there can be little 
expectation that life will be found. We may note, 
moreover, that the higher forms of life are less 
resistant to heat than the simple organisms. The 



42 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

temperature might be such that the simplest types 
of life could exist, though any development of 
higher and more complex types of life could not 
occur. Without attempting to lay down any hard 
and fast limit, it does not seem probable that 
complex living structures can be expected wherever 
the temperature is much in excess of about 150 F. 
Though most forms of life are unable to survive 
at very low temperatures, it is known that some can 
withstand extreme cold for long periods. Low 
temperatures, unlike high temperatures, do not 
break up chemical compounds. But when life is 
not actually destroyed by very low temperatures it 
becomes latent, as it were. There seems to be a 
state of suspended animation, in which all vital 
processes are suspended until the temperature is 
raised. We cannot believe that, if these conditions 
prevailed on any other world, life could develop, for 
how can there be any development if vital processes 
are suspended ? The reason why low temperatures 
are inimical to life is evident. The development of 
vital processes requires energy. On the Earth, the 
energy of all living things is ultimately dependent 
upon green plants, which in turn are dependent for 
their energy upon radiation from the Sun. On a 
planet in some other solar system, vital processes 
must similarly be ultimately dependent upon 
energy received from the parent Sun. The temp- 
erature of any such world is conditioned by the 
energy that it receives from its parent Sun; a low 
temperature implies that it receives but a small 
supply of energy. If the temperature is so low that 
there is not sufficient energy available for vital 



CONDITIONS FOR EXISTENCE OF LIFE 43 

processes, there can be no life. We must conclude, 
therefore, that if on any world we find either a high 
or a low temperature, it is extremely improbable 
that life in any form could exist on it. 

It will be clear that the restriction to a moderate 
temperature enables all the stars to be at once 
ruled out of consideration as possible homes of life. 
For the temperatures of the stars are so high that 
even on the coolest of them only a few of the simplest 
compounds are to be found. All the complicated 
molecules that are present in every type of living 
organism are broken up by heat at temperatures far 
below those that prevail in the coolest stars. Our 
search for life elsewhere in the universe must, there- 
fore, be restricted to the planetary bodies, which 
have much lower temperatures than the stars. It 
may be mentioned that, on this subject, Sir William 
Herschel, whose conclusions about the structure of 
the Universe were far in advance of his time, held 
views that were strangely erroneous. He believed 
that the Sun was a cold, dark body, covered with a 
layer of fiery clouds. He thought that it was " most 
probably also inhabited, like the rest of the planets, 
by beings whose organs are adapted to the peculiar 
circumstances of that vast globe. " 

Given satisfactory conditions of temperature, 
some further clues as to the requirements for the 
existence of plant or animal life can be obtained 
from consideration of the requirements for life on 
the Earth. The green plant builds up carbohydrates 
in the following way: carbon dioxide is absorbed 
from the air by the plant and enters into union with 
he water in the plant, forming carbonic acid 



44 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

(H 2 O -f CO 2 ), which may be represented by the 
OH 

I 

formula HO G = O. Under the action of sun- 
light, one of the OH groups is split up and replaced 
by hydrogen, the oxygen being given off by the plant 
to the air. Sunlight provides the energy that is 
needed for this transformation to be able to take place, 
but it is the green colouring matter in the plant, 
called chlorophyll, which makes the transformation 
possible. For this reason, chlorophyll is called a 
photocatalyst; it enables the transformation to occur 
under the action of light, taking some complex 
part itself in the transformation, though it remains 
unchanged when the transformation is completed. 
By this action, a substance with the formula 
H 

I 
HO G = O, known as formic acid, is produced; 

it contains the characteristic carbohydrate group- 
ing, H C OH. When the formic acid is in turn 
reduced, and six of the resulting groups unite to 
form a six-carbon chain, a carbohydrate is ob- 
tained; the formation of more complex carbo- 
hydrates and of fats, in the way already explained, 
follows naturally. 

There are many lower plants that obtain all their 
carbon in the dark, without the action of sunlight, 
by the reduction of carbon dioxide and then synthe- 
sise their organic constituents from that source. In 
such cases, chemical energy provides the supply of 
energy that is needed, instead of the luminous 
energy from sunlight. Whichever process is followed, 



CONDITIONS FOR EXISTENCE Ol LIFE 45 

a supply of carbon dioxide is essential, from which 
the plant can obtain its carbon. It would seem, 
therefore, that plant life is dependent upon carbon 
dioxide being available, though the carbon dioxide 
need not necessarily be present in large amount, 
The proportion of carbon dioxide contained in the 
atmosphere of the Earth is only between three and 
four parts in ten thousand; this small proportion 
supplies the needs of the extensive plant life on the 
Earth. 

The supply of carbon dioxide in the Earth's 
atmosphere is maintained by the process of com- 
bustion. The combustion of coal consists essenti- 
ally in the combination of carbon and oxygen, with 
the production of carbon dioxide. If a supply of 
oxygen is not available the coal will not burn. The 
process of burning coal, considered as a chemical 
action, is, therefore, merely the oxidation of carbon. 
Heat is given out when coal burns; this means 
merely that the chemical process of the oxidation 
of carbon into carbon dioxide is accompanied by 
the production of heat. In other words, the 
oxidation of carbon provides a supply of energy. 

The body of every living animal is continually at 
work, and is therefore using up energy. This 
energy must somehow be supplied to it. In 
general, the supply of energy is obtained by com- 
bustion or, in other words, by the oxidation of 
carbon. This chemical process can occur, it need 
hardly be explained, without any visible flame; the 
combustion of a given quantity of carbon will 
provide the same amount of energy whether it takes 
place slowly, as in the human body, or rapidly and 



46 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

with the production of flame, as when coal is burned. 

If energy is to be provided by the process of com- 
bustion, a supply of oxygen is necessary, whether 
the organism lives in water or out of it. The 
organism must, therefore, be provided with some 
means by which it can take oxygen from the atmo- 
sphere or from the water. In the lower forms of life 
the oxygen is absorbed through the skin and the 
carbonic acid or carbon dioxide, the end-product of 
combustion, is got rid of through the skin. In the 
course of evolution, special organs of breathing 
have been developed in many types of life; the gills 
of fishes, the respiring membranes of spiders and the 
lungs of human beings and many other animals are 
instances of such organs which, by increasing the 
area of the breathing surface, enable sufficient 
oxygen to be taken in to supply, through the process 
of combustion, the energy requirements. 

Whenever, therefore, the supply of energy for the 
maintenance of vital processes is provided by com- 
bustion, an adequate supply of oxygen is necessary 
for the continuance of life. But is it possible that 
energy can be provided in any other way ? There 
is one other source of energy, which is utilised by 
some organisms, viz. the process of fermentation. 

The molecule of sugar, represented diagram- 
matically on p. 34, can be broken up into two 
molecules of alcohol : 

H H 

I I 
H G C OH 

I I 
H H 



CONDITIONS FOR EXISTENCE OF LIFE 47 

and two molecules of carbon dioxide. The chemical 
equation representing the transformation is as 
follows : 

C 6 H 12 6 = 2 C 2 H 6 + 2 C0 2 

The sugar is broken up, alcohol being produced 
with evolution of carbon dioxide. This is merely 
the ordinary process of fermentation, which occurs, 
for instance, when wine is formed from grape-juice. 
The act of fermentation is accompanied by the 
evolution of heat, this heat representing the energy 
which can be made use of by any organism that 
relies upon fermentation for its supply of energy. 
The chemical change called fermentation, repre- 
sented by the above equation, is brought about by 
yeast or other forms of cell life, which supply 
enzymes or transformers, whose presence makes 
possible a chemical change that would not other- 
wise take place. 

The process of fermentation is not a very efficient 
method of providing energy; it is far inferior in 
efficiency to the process of combustion. It is conse- 
quently not well adapted as a general means of 
providing energy required for the maintenance of 
vital processes. It is the method employed, for 
instance, by certain parasitic organisms that live in 
the intestines, where a plentiful supply of starch or 
sugar is available. Such organisms do not need to 
provide energy for the maintenance of their own 
heat, because they live a sheltered existence under 
conditions of uniform temperature. They are able 
to live without any supply of oxygen, though they 
are dependent for their continued existence on a 



48 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

host who could not live without a supply of oxygen; 
they are consequently dependent in an indirect 
manner upon a supply of oxygen. 

It seems reasonable to conclude that animal life is 
normally dependent upon a supply of oxygen, but 
that under exceptional circumstances it can exist 
without oxygen; it must then be able to obtain a 
supply of energy by the process of fermentation. 

A further condition for the existence of life seems 
to be the presence of water, either in the liquid form 
or as water vapour. Neither seeds nor spores will 
germinate in absolutely dry soil; when life is not 
actually destroyed by the absence of moisture it 
becomes latent and no development ensues. Water 
is an essential constituent of the tissues of both 
animal and vegetable life, because a cell needs a 
certain amount of water to carry on its life. It is by 
imbibing water containing the chemical substances 
in which they feed that cells are enabled to grow 
and to multiply by continual division. In particu- 
lar, we find that egg and sperm cells are specially 
sensitive cells, which cannot withstand much 
desiccation; in order that fertilisation may take 
place these cells must meet either in water or in a 
damp atmosphere such as is provided by the female 
sex ducts. In many animals that live in water, such 
as fishes and frogs, fertilisation takes place outside 
the body; in most animals that live on land, on the 
other hand, fertilisation takes place internally, 
within the female sex ducts. It does not seem 
probable that in the absence of moisture any form 
of life could develop. 

There are many gases that have a marked toxic 



CONDITIONS FOR EXISTENCE OF LIFE 49 

action on living organisms, such as ammonia, 
chlorine, carbon monoxide and sulphuretted hydro- 
gen. Though their presence in the atmosphere of 
any world might not necessarily prove conclusively 
that there could be no life on it, it would provide 
strong evidence against its probability. We shall 
find that poisonous gases are prominent constitu- 
ents of the atmosphere of some of the planets. 

The considerations summarised in this chapter 
should provide a reliable guide to the possibility 
or the impossibility of the existence of living organ- 
isms on another world, provided that we can 
obtain sufficient information about the conditions 
that prevail on it. If we can show that the con- 
ditions are favourable for life, it may not necessarily 
follow that there must be life. What is certain is 
that if suitable conditions exist, if there is an ade- 
quate supply of energy and if there is a suitable 
transformer for that energy, which can turn it into 
the chemical energy of carbon compounds, then 
the complex organic substances which form the 
basis of living cells not only can arise but will arise. 
How the step from these complex organic sub- 
stances to the simple living cell is made is not known. 
Nevertheless, it seems reasonable to suppose that 
whenever in the Universe the proper conditions 
arise, life must inevitably come into existence. 
This is the view that is generally accepted by 
biologists. 

It has been supposed by various people at one 
time or another that life did not arise on the Earth 
spontaneously, but that it was carried to the Earth 
by cosmic dust particles or by material particles 



50 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

from some other world where life was already in 
existence. In some forms of this hypothesis, it is 
suggested that life was once created on one world 
and that it has ever since been disseminated from 
this original source. Such a theory does riot bring 
us any nearer to understanding how life has come 
into being and merely removes the problem from 
the possibility of investigation by shifting it to 
some remote world. Helmholtz adopted a rather 
different form of the hypothesis and queried whether 
life had ever arisen; he suggested that life might be 
as old as matter and that the germs of life passed 
from one world to another and developed wherever 
they found suitable soil. All such hypotheses 
appear to be inherently improbable and they leave 
the solution of the problem of the origin of life as 
remote as ever. 

If we accept the view that life on the Earth 
arose as the result of the operation of certain 
natural causes and that life will arise or has arisen 
on any other world where the proper conditions 
prevail, it does not follow that life will develop or 
that it has developed on such a world along the 
identical lines that it has followed on the Earth. 
The various forms of life that have appeared in 
succession on the Earth have no doubt resulted 
from the particular conditions, themselves slowly 
changing, that have prevailed on the Earth. If 
we consider the geological history of the Earth 
the cooling down of the material in its initial 
gaseous condition until liquefaction took place, 
followed by the formation of a solid crust as further 
cooling ensued ; the successive stages of crumbling 



CONDITIONS FOR EXISTENCE OF LIFE 5! 

and folding of the surface with the formation of 
mountain ranges, as the solid crust adjusted itself 
to a cooling and shrinking interior; the condensation 
of water vapour to form the oceans ; the formation of 
sedimentary deposits beneath the oceans, through 
the denuding action of rain, streams and rivers, 
and their subsequent upheaval to form new land 
areas; the changes of climate shown by alternating 
ice-ages and glacial periods it will be realised that 
life on the Earth, in the various forms that now 
exist, has been conditioned by a complex series of 
changes. The general sequence of events may have 
been similar on another world, but their details 
must inevitably have differed considerably. Differ- 
ences in temperature, in the constitution of the at- 
mosphere, in the proportions of land and water 
and in their distribution, and in the general 
accompanying phenomena must have profoundly 
influenced the course of evolution. The degree 
of adaptation to their environment shown by many 
animals provides evidence that mere environment 
has had a considerable effect on the development 
of life. It is reasonable to suppose, therefore, that 
life on any other world will have developed along 
forms that are entirely different from any with 
which we are familiar and that are possibly beyond 
our conception. Divergences, which may have 
been small in the most primitive types of life, would 
tend to become more and more accentuated in the 
slow course of evolution. Whether, on any other 
world where life may have arisen, intelligent beings 
the counterpart of man have evolved must be a 
question for mere surmise. It must remain outside 



52 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

the scope of this discussion. The most that we are 
justified in attempting is a discussion of the suita- 
bility of the various planets of the solar system as a 
home of life and of the possibility that other 
planetary systems may exist amongst which there 
may also be some with conditions favourable for 
life. 



CHAPTER III 



METHODS OF 
INVESTIGATION 

BEFORE considering what information can be 
obtained about the conditions that prevail on the 
various planets in the solar system, we must 
describe the methods by which some information 
can be gained about the extent and nature of their 
atmospheres and about the temperatures at their 
surfaces. 

Simple considerations can tell us whether or 
not any planet may be expected to possess an 
atmosphere. Before looking at the planet in the 
telescope, we shall know what observation is likely 
to reveal. 

Let us consider what an atmosphere really con- 
sists of. A gas is composed of an aggregation of 
molecules which are in a state of perpetual motion. 
The molecules move rapidly about in all directions, 
describing straight paths with uniform velocity, 
except when they collide with other molecules. 
If the gas is contained in a closed vessel, the con- 
tinual bombardment of the walls of the vessel by 
the molecules that hit them produces an integrated 
effect which we call the pressure of the gas. If 
we double the quantity of gas in the vessel, the 
number of collisions of the molecules with the walls 
in each second is doubled; the pressure is therefore 
doubled. That is why the pressure in a motor 
tyre increases as we pump air into it. 

53 



54 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

If we think of a simple gas, all of whose 
molecules are of the same kind, at any given 
instant some molecules will be moving faster than 
others. 

The speeds of some molecules will be reduced 
when a collision occurs ; the speeds of other mole- 
cules will be increased. It is impossible to study in 
detail the motions of the individual molecules bvit 
the statistical distribution of the velocities amongst 
the complete aggregation of molecules can be 
investigated. The mathematical investigation of 
the statistical properties of the molecular assem- 
blage forms the subject called the kinetic theory 
of gases. For a given temperature, the average 
velocity of all the molecules remains statistically 
constant. The number of fast-moving molecules 
with velocities greater than a value that is much in 
excess of the average velocity falls off very rapidly 
as this value increases; but there are definite, 
though small, proportions of molecules with 
speeds of 10, 20 or even 100 times the average 
speed. 

The velocities of the molecules depend upon the 
temperature of the gas. The average velocity is 
proportional to the square root of the temperature 
measured from absolute zero (273 C.). At 
the absolute zero of temperature, the molecules 
have no velocity. They are all brought to rest. 
No lower temperature than this can be imagined. 
Physicists have been able to reach temperatures 
within a fraction of a degree of the absolute zero, 
but the zero itself has never been reached. The 
average velocity at the temperature of boiling 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION 55 

water (iooG.) is, for instance, 17 per cent, 
greater than the average velocity at the freezing 
point of water (o C.). By means of this relation- 
ship, the average velocity at any temperature can 
readily be found if its value at some given temper- 
ature is known. 

In a mixture of gases, the molecules of different 
kinds move at different speeds. The lighter the 
molecules the faster they move on the average. 
There is a simple law, known as the law of equi- 
partition of energy, which governs the distribution 
of velocities amongst the different kinds of mole- 
cules. The law of equipartition of energy states 
that in a mixture of gases the average energy of 
each kind of molecule is the same. Since the 
energy of a molecule is proportional to its molecular 
weight multiplied by the square of its velocity, it 
follows that the average speed of each kind of 
molecule is inversely proportional to the square 
root of its molecular weight. In a mixture of 
oxygen and hydrogen, for instance, the average 
speed of the molecules of oxygen will only be one- 
quarter of that of the molecules of hydrogen, 
because oxygen is sixteen times as heavy as hydro- 
gen. 

It is more convenient, in general, to use a 
velocity which is such that the pressure exerted by 
the gas is the same as if all the molecules were 
moving with this particular speed. It is slightly 
different from the average speed, being about 
nine per cent, larger. This velocity is tabulated 
for several gases, at the temperature of o C. 
(32 F.). 



56 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

Miles a second. 

Hydrogen . . . . .1*15 

Helium ...... 0-82 

Water vapour . . . . .0-38 

Nitrogen . . . . .0*31 

Oxygen ...... 0*29 

Carbon dioxide . . . .0-25 

In a cubic inch of air at normal temperature and 
pressure (o C. and 760 mm. of mercury) the 
number of molecules is about 500 million billion. 
The figures just given indicate that these molecules 
are moving with high speeds. It is evident that 
no molecule will move very far before it collides 
with another molecule. The average distance 
travelled by a molecule before it undergoes a 
collision is only about the two hundred thousandth 
part of an inch. The average distance traversed 
by a molecule between collisions is inversely pro- 
portional to the number of molecules in a unit 
volume and therefore becomes greater as the pres- 
sure is decreased. In a vacuum tube in which the 
pressure is one-tenth of a millimetre of mercury, 
the average distance between collisions is about 
one twenty-fifth of an inch. The average interval 
of time between successive collisions becomes 
correspondingly greater as the pressure is dimin- 
ished. 

The density of the gaseous atmosphere of the 
Earth or of another planet decreases with increasing 
distance from the surface of the planet. Near the 
upper limit of the atmosphere, where the density 
is very low, the molecules will travel for a con- 
siderable distance between collisions. If a mole- 
cule in this region happens to rebound after a 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION 57 

collision in an outward direction and with a speed 
much greater than the average speed, there is the 
possibility that it may escape into outer space, 
provided that it does not come into collision with 
any other molecule. 

In order that any particle, whether large or 
small, may be able to escape altogether in this 
way it is necessary that its velocity should 
exceed a certain critical value called the velocity 
of escape. The velocity of escape plays a very 
important role in our consideration of planetary 
atmospheres. 

A gas possesses the property of spreading 
throughout the whole of any space in which it is 
placed. If, for instance, we place a small sealed 
flask containing gas in an evacuated chamber and 
then break the flask, the gas will at once spread 
throughout the whole of the chamber. This is the 
natural result of the movements of the mole- 
cules, which travel in straight paths until they 
collide with other molecules or with the walls of 
the containing vessel. Why, then, does not the 
atmosphere of the Earth rapidly dissipate away 
into space ? Why do the outermost molecules not 
fly away ? The reason is that the atmosphere is 
held bound by the gravitational pull of the Earth. 
The same force that makes the apple fall from the 
tree to the ground holds the air captive and pre- 
vents it spreading out into space. 

Let us suppose that a stone is dropped from a 
certain height to the ground. It falls with an 
accelerated velocity because of the attracting force 
of gravity. We can imagine this motion to be 



58 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

reversed at each point of its path. If the stone is 
projected upwards with a velocity equal to that 
with which it hit the ground, its velocity will 
progressively decrease; at any distance above the 
ground, its upward velocity will be equal to its 
downward velocity at the corresponding distance 
when it was falling. The stone will come to rest 
instantaneously at a height equal to that from which 
it was previously dropped and it will then com- 
mence to fall to the ground again. 

We now imagine the stone to be dropped from 
an infinitely great height, and we suppose the 
Earth to be isolated in space so that we need 
not concern ourselves with the gravitational attrac- 
tion of any other bodies. The stone will fall 
towards the Earth with a gradually increasing 
velocity. It will reach the ground with a certain 
velocity, V, which will have a finite value, although 
the stone has fallen from an infinitely great distance. 
V is, in fact, given by the formula 

V 2 = zGMfa 

where G is the value of the constant of gravitation, 
M is the mass of the Earth and a is its radius. 

If the stone is projected upwards with the 
velocity V, it will reach an infinitely great distance 
before it comes to rest; if it is projected with a 
velocity less than V, it will eventually come to rest 
and then fall back to Earth, because any velocity 
less than V corresponds to the velocity acquired in 
falling to the ground from a height that is finite. 
It follows that the stone can only get completely 
away from the earth if its initial velocity is equal to. 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION 59 

or greater than V. It is for this reason that V is 
called the velocity of escape. 

We can determine the velocity necessary for any 
body to escape from the Earth by substituting the 
values for the constant of gravitation, and for the 
mass and radius of the Earth. In this way we 
find that the velocity of escape from the Earth is 
7-1 miles a second. 1 

Returning to the consideration of the outer 
layers of the atmosphere, not a single molecule 
can possibly escape into outer space unless its 
velocity exceeds the escape velocity. But whenever 
a molecule rebounds away from the Earth with a 
speed greater than the escape velocity, it will 
escape from the Earth's gravitation, provided that 
it does not collide with any other molecule. There 
must inevitably be such a loss of the faster-moving 
molecules from the outer layers of the atmosphere. 

Comparing the velocity of escape from the Earth 
with the average speeds of different types of mole- 
cules given above, it appears that a molecule of 
hydrogen must have rather more than six times its 
average speed to be able to escape, whereas a 
molecule of oxygen must have nearly twenty-five 
times its average speed. It is therefore much 
easier for hydrogen to escape than for oxygen. 

1 For those who are interested in verifying this value, the data are : 

Constant of gravitation, G = 6-67 io 8 
Mass of Earth (in grams), M = 5-97 x io 27 gm. 
Radius of Earth (in cms.), a = 6-37 x io 8 cm. 
With these values we find 
V= 1-13 X io 8 cm./sec. = 11-3 km./scc. 

= 7- 1 miles a second. 



6O LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

But this statement is merely qualitative. Under 
any given conditions at what rate will the loss of 
atmosphere occur ? 

This is a problem that is capable of treatment by 
the mathematical principles of the kinetic theory of 
gases. The necessary calculations were made some 
years ago by Sir James Jeans. He found that if 
the velocity of escape is four times the average 
molecular velocity, the atmosphere would be 
practically completely lost in fifty thousand years; 
if the velocity of escape is four and a half times the 
average molecular velocity, the atmosphere would 
be lost in thirty million years; whilst if the velocity 
of escape is five times the average molecular 
velocity, twenty-five thousand million years would 
be required for the loss to be almost complete. 

The rate at which an atmosphere is lost is there- 
fore conditioned in a very critical manner by the 
ratio between the velocity of escape and the average 
velocity of the molecules. If this ratio is 4, the rate 
of loss is very rapid, remembering that the age of 
the Earth is of the order of three or four thousand 
million years; if the ratio is 5, the rate of loss is so 
slow that we can regard the atmosphere as practi- 
cally immune from loss. If, therefore, we know the 
velocity of escape from any planet (which is de- 
pendent upon a knowledge of the mass and radius 
of the planet) and the averager velocity of the 
molecules (which is determined by the molecular 
weight and the temperature), we can estimate 
with considerable accuracy whether the planet is 
likely to have retained its original atmosphere 
almost in its entirety, or to have lost a substantial 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION 



6l 



portion of its atmosphere, or to have lost essentially 
the whole of its atmosphere. 

In the following table are given, for the Sun, 
Moon and planets, the radii and masses in terms of 
the corresponding quantities for the Earth as units, 
together with the velocities of escape in miles a 
second. 











Radius 


Mass 


Velocity of es 










(Earth - i). 


(Earth = i). 


(miles/sec. 


Sun . 








lOQ-I 


332,100 


392 


Mercury 








o-39 


0*044 


2-4 


Venus 








0-97 


0-82 


<3'5 


Earth 








I-OO 


I -OO 


7-1 


Moon 








0-27 


O-OI23 


i'5 


Mars 








o-53 


0-108 


3'2 


Jupiter 








io-95 


3i7-i 


38 


Saturn 








9-02 


94'9 


23 


Uranus 








4-00 


14-65 


H 


Neptune 








3*92 


17-16 


'5 


Pluto 








? O-IO 


? o-oi 


? 2'2 



Mere inspection of the figures for the velocities of 
escape, given in the last column, suggests that the 
large planets, Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus and Nep- 
tune, may be expected to have atmospheres that are 
much more extensive than the Earth's atmosphere; 
that Venus may be expected to have an atmosphere 
comparable with that of the Earth; that Mars may 
be expected to have an atmosphere considerably 
thinner than that of the Earth and that Mercury 
and the Moon may be expected to have little or no 
atmosphere. The extent to which these expecta- 
tions are confirmed with be considered in subse- 
quent chapters. 



62 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

When a planet has been proved to have an 
atmosphere, we naturally wish to find out as much 
as possible about the composition of the atmosphere. 
For this purpose, we must have recourse to the 
spectroscope. The light from the planet is passed 
through the spectroscope, which contains one or 
more prisms ; the result of this is to spread the light 
out into a band or spectrum, showing the colours 
of the rainbow, and each point in the spectrum 
corresponds to a definite wave-length. 

If sunlight is analysed by the spectroscope, the 
light being admitted to the spectroscope through a 
narrow slit, it is found that the spectrum is crossed 
by a large number of fine dark lines, amounting to 
many thousands ; to each of these lines there corre- 
sponds a definite wave-length and a definite in- 
tensity. They are known as the Fraunhofer lines, 
after the physicist who first investigated them. The 
analysis of this spectrum provides a great deal of 
information about the composition of the Sun. If, for 
instance, we pass an electric spark between two pieces 
of iron and examine the spectrum of the incan- 
descent vapour between them, we find a considerable 
number of bright lines, spaced at irregular intervals 
and of different intensities; this particular series 
of lines is produced only by iron and by no other 
element. It is characteristic of iron ; in a similar way, 
every other element has its own characteristic spec- 
trum. If, now, light from a hot incandescent source, 
which has a continuous spectrum showing all the 
colours of the rainbow, is passed through the vapour 
of iron at a lower temperature, the continuous spec- 
trum of the hot source is found to be crossed by a 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION 63 

number of dark lines, each of which is exactly 
identical in wave-length with one of the bright lines 
in the spectrum of the incandescent iron vapour. 
Such a spectrum is called an absorption spectrum. 
The Fraunhofer lines in the spectrum of the Sun 
are of this nature; the hot interior of the Sun would 
give a continuous spectrum, but the cooler outer 
layers absorb the radiations of various wave-lengths, 
thus producing the dark Fraunhofer lines. 

When we investigate the spectrum of sunlight, we 
find that the spectrum of iron, line by line, is 
contained in it, proving conclusively that there is 
iron in the Sun. In a similar way, we can detect 
the presence of one element after another in the 
Sun and learn much about the elements contained 
in the Sun ; we can, moreover, go farther than this 
and use the relative intensities of the lines due to 
different elements to obtain some fairly reliable 
conclusions about the abundance of each element. 
If, for instance, we were to double the amount of 
one element in the Sun, leaving the amounts of the 
other elements unaltered, we should find the 
intensities of the lines of that particular element 
would be relatively strengthened. It is by means 
of such considerations that we can determine the 
relative abundance of this or of that element in the 
Sun, or in a remote star or nebula. 

There is, however, one complicating factor that 
enters into the analysis of the light from the Sun. 
We make our observations from the bottom of our 
extensive atmosphere. The light from the Sun has 
to pass through this atmosphere before it reaches us 
and some of the light is absorbed in the atmosphere. 



64 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

The consequence is that some of the absorption 
lines that are present in the observed spectrum of the 
Sun do not originate in the Sun but in the atmo- 
sphere of our Earth. Of particular importance to 
us is the absorption produced by the ozone in the 
atmosphere. The amount of ozone in the atmo- 
sphere is extremely small; it is estimated to be 
equivalent to a layer about one-tenth of an inch 
thick at atmospheric pressure and room tempera- 
ture. It occurs almost exclusively above the 
highest clouds, the greatest density being at a 
height of between twenty and thirty miles. Small 
though the amount of ozone is, the absorption pro- 
duced by it in the ultra-violet region of the spectrum 
is so strong that all of the light of wave-length shorter 
than O'oooois inch is completely absorbed; none 
of the light in this region of the spectrum is con- 
sequently accessible to observation. 1 Unfortunate 
though this is for the investigations of the astron- 
omer, it is a fortunate circumstance for life as we 
know it: for animals, including human beings, 
could not exist as they are now constituted, if there 
were not a small amount of ozone in the atmosphere. 
The importance of ozone biologically is this: 

1 The approximate limits of wave-length for the different colours 
of the spectrum are as follows : 

Ultra-violet L 0-000014 inch. 

Violet 0-000014 to 1 8 inch. 

Blue 0-000018 to 20 inch. 

Green 0*000020 to 22 inch. 

Yellow 0-000022 to 24 inch. 

Orange 0-000024 to 26 inch. 

Red 0-000026 to 30 inch. 

Infra-red 7 0-000030 inch. 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION 65 

much of the radiation of short wave-length that is 
absorbed by ozone is very injurious to the eye and 
has an injurious effect also on the other tissues of the 
body. The light from glowing mercury vapour is 
rich in the ultra-violet light. Quartz is fairly 
transparent to such light, whilst glass absorbs it 
strongly. A quartz mercury vapour lamp is 
therefore a powerful source of ultra-violet light and 
such lamps are accordingly used for ultra-violet 
light treatment; anyone who has undergone such 
treatment knows that the exposure to the lamp must 
be carefully timed, otherwise severe damage to the 
tissues may result, and that it is necessary to wear 
dark spectacles for the protection of the eyes during 
the exposure to the rays. In moderate amount, 
however, the ultra-violet light is beneficial because 
it keeps us in proper health and is effective in pre- 
venting rickets. If, then, there were no ozone in 
the atmosphere, eyes as now constituted could not 
have developed and the bodily tissues would be 
seriously injured; if, on the other hand, the ozone 
were present in greater amount, life, as we are 
familiar with it, could not continue. It is not to be 
concluded that no animal life would be possible if 
there were no ozone in the atmosphere; this is 
merely a striking illustration of how life has 
adapted itself to the conditions that prevail. In 
this particular instance, however, the adaptation 
is surprisingly close. The amount of ozone in the 
atmosphere is not constant, it is variable within 
somewhat narrow limits but these limits fortunately 
lie between the two extremes, the one at which 
on the one hand the amount of ultra-violet light 



66 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

would become destructive of life and the other at 
which the amount would become insufficient to 
maintain it. 

The oxygen in the atmosphere produces some 
strong absorptions in the spectrum of the Sun; 
these are mainly in the regions of longer wave- 
length, the red and the near infra-red regions of the 
spectrum, though there are also some weaker 
absorptions of shorter wave-length in the visual 
spectrum. The two strong absorptions in the red 
region of the spectrum that were called the A and 
B bands by Fraunhofer are caused by oxygen. 
Water-vapour in the atmosphere produces some 
extremely strong absorptions in the long wave- 
length infra-red region. Nitrogen, on the other 
hand, though it is the most abundant constituent 
of the atmosphere, produces no absorptions in 
the region with which our investigations are 
concerned. 

When we analyse the spectrum of the Sun, how 
are we to distinguish between the absorptions that 
originate in the Sun itself and those that are pro- 
duced by our atmosphere ? There are two ways 
in which the absorptions of terrestrial origin can be 
identified. The first method is to compare the 
spectra of the Sun taken at different altitudes. The 
lower the altitude of the Sun, the longer is the path 
that the light from the Sun has to travel through the 
atmosphere in order to reach us; it is, in fact, for 
this very reason that the light from the Sun^ is 
much less intense towards sunset than it is at mid- 
day. The longer the path through the atmosphere 
the greater become the effects of atmospheric 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION 67 

absorption. The lower the altitude of the Sun, 
therefore, the more intense are the absorptions of 
terrestrial origin relative to those of solar origin. 
The second method is to compare the spectra of 
light from the east and west limbs of the Sun. The 
Sun rotates on its axis in about twenty-seven days; 
as a result of this rotation the west limb is moving 
away from us whilst the east limb is moving towards 
us. The wave-length of the light received from a 
source that is moving towards us is shortened and 
the absorptions are therefore displaced slightly 
towards the violet end of the spectrum ; the wave- 
length of the light from a source that is moving 
away from us is lengthened and the absorptions are 
therefore displaced slightly towards the red end of 
the spectrum. Comparing the spectra of the east 
and west limbs of the Sun, we consequently find 
that there is a slight separation between the corre- 
sponding absorptions in the light from the two 
regions. The absorptions that originate in our 
atmosphere are not affected by the rotation of the 
Sun and these absorptions coincide in position in 
the spectra of the light from the two opposite limbs. 
If, then, the spectra of the eastern and western 
limbs of the Sun are photographed simultaneously 
or in immediate succession on the same plate, the 
absorptions of terrestrial origin can be at once 
picked out, because they consist of all the absorptions 
that coincide in position in the two spectra. This 
method has the advantage over the first method that 
it does not necessitate the comparison of spectra 
obtained at different altitudes and therefore at 
different times. 



68 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

Having by one or other of these methods identi- 
fied the absorptions that originate in the atmosphere 
of the Earth, the way is open to learn something 
about the composition of the atmospheres of the 
planets. Let us first consider for a moment the 
nature of the light that we receive from a planet. 
The planets are cool bodies and have no intrinsic 
light of their own. We see a planet by means of 
light from the Sun that falls upon it and is reflected 
back. As the sunlight penetrates into the atmo- 
sphere of the planet, it is partially scattered and 
partially absorbed. The depth to which it pene- 
trates depends upon the nature and extent of the 
atmosphere; the light may or may not actually 
penetrate to the surface of the planet. Some of the 
light that reaches us from the planet will have 
penetrated to a greater depth into the atmosphere 
of the planet and some will have penetrated into 
a lesser depth; the net effect may be expected to be 
that the light will bear some impress of its passage 
into and out of the atmosphere of the planet, so 
that when the light is analysed by the spectroscope, 
absorptions that have originated in the atmosphere 
of the planet may be revealed, which will serve to 
give some clues to the nature of the atmosphere. 
An absorption in the atmosphere of the planet 
that does not correspond with any absorptions pro- 
duced in the atmosphere of the Earth will be 
readily revealed. On the other hand, it may 
happen that the atmosphere of the planet contains 
oxygen or water-vapour, whose absorptions will 
coincide with the absorptions produced by the 
same substances in the Earth's atmosphere. Some 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION 69 

care is required, therefore, to decide whether the 
absorptions produced by oxygen and water-vapour 
arise entirely in the atmosphere of the Earth or 
whether they include the effect of absorptions 
originating in the atmosphere of the planet. 
Oxygen and water-vapour are the two substances 
whose presence in the planetary atmosphere is of 
the greatest significance for the possibility of the 
existence of life and it is these two substances whose 
presence may be most difficult to establish. 

Two methods can be used to distinguish between 
an absorption of terrestrial origin and the same 
absorption of planetary origin. One method is to 
compare the spectrum of the planet with the spec- 
trum of the Moon, the two spectra being obtained 
on the same night and as nearly as possible at the 
same time. The Moon and the planet should be at 
equal altitudes when their spectra are photographed, 
so that the absorptions produced by the Earth's 
atmosphere will be equal, or very nearly equal, in 
the two cases, because the air-paths are equal. 
The Moon, as we shall see, is devoid of atmosphere; 
it follows that if an absorption is present in the 
spectrum of the planet and not in that of the Moon, 
or is stronger in the spectrum of the planet than in 
that of the Moon, it must originate in the atmo- 
sphere of the planet. If the absorption produced 
by the atmosphere of the Earth is very much more 
intense than that produced by the atmosphere of 
the planet, we may fail to detect in this way the 
planetary absorption, because the difference in the 
intensities of the absorptions in the two spectra 
may be too small. The second method of invest!- 



7O LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

gation is a more delicate one, and is specially useful 
for deciding whether substances that are present 
in our own atmosphere are also present in the 
atmosphere of the planet. It is based on the dis- 
placement of the absorption lines in the light from 
a moving source, which we have already used for 
the detection of the absorptions produced by the 
Earth's atmosphere from the comparison of the 
light from the east and west limbs of the Sun. 
The spectrum of the planet is photographed at a 
time when the planet is approaching or receding 
from the Earth most rapidly. The relative motion 
will displace the absorptions due to the planet's 
atmosphere with respect to those due to our own 
atmosphere and in this way we may hope to detect 
planetary absorptions of low intensity. 

It must be emphasised that though by these 
methods we may expect to obtain some informa- 
tion about the constitution of the atmosphere of the 
planets, the information can never be complete. 
There are many possible constituents of an atmo- 
sphere that show no absorptions in the region of the 
spectrum that is accessible to study. There is no 
means available by which such constituents can be 
detected. Amongst these undetectable constituents 
are hydrogen, nitrogen, helium, neon and argon. 

A knowledge of the temperatures of the planets 
is of importance for our consideration of the 
possibility of the existence of life. Some general 
information about the temperature conditions can 
be obtained from theoretical considerations. 

We shall assume, to begin with, that the planet 
has no atmosphere, because the effects of an 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION 71 

atmosphere on the temperature of the planet are 
complicated and difficult to estimate. We shall 
consider first the extreme case of a planet which, 
like Mercury, always turns the same face to the 
Sun. We can estimate the temperature of the 
surface of the planet if we suppose that the planet 
has no output of heat of its own, but that there is an 
exact balance between the heat that it receives 
from the Sun and the heat that it radiates into 
space. From the measurements of the radiation 
from the Sun received at the surface of the Earth, 
we know that the energy from the Sun reaching 
the Earth just outside the Earth's atmosphere is 
equivalent to 1-54 horse-power each square yard. 
If the distance of the planet from the Sun is R times 
the distance of the Earth from the Sun, the point on 
the surface of the planet where the Sun is overhead 
receives energy at the rate of i '54/R 2 horse-power 
per square yard. This must be equivalent to the 
rate at which heat is radiated. This rate is deter- 
mined by the temperature of the planet. In 1879 
Stefan put forward the suggestion that the total 
radiation from a body is proportioned to the fourth 
power of its absolute temperature (i.e. the tempera- 
ture measured from the absolute zero, 273 C.). 
This law is accurately true only for what is termed 
a " black body," a body that completely absorbs all 
the radiations falling on it. The radiation from 
the planets is not strictly in accordance with 
Stefan's law, though we can use the law to derive 
an estimate of the temperature that will be suffi- 
ciently accurate for our purpose. The constant of 
proportionality, which enters into Stefan's law, 



72 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

has been found by experiment. Using this observed 
value and equating the energy received and radiated, 
it is found that the temperature (on the absolute 
scale, denoted^ by K) is given by the expression 
T = 392 / A/R. At the distance of the Earth, where 
R = i, the temperature obtained is 392 K, or 
119 C. The temperature found in this way is the 
highest temperature at any point on the surface of 
a planet that always turns the same face to the 
Sun provided the assumptions that the planet has 
no atmosphere and that it is a "black body 5 ' are 
satisfied. At other points on the planet the tem- 
perature would be lower, because the Sun's rays 
would fall obliquely instead of vertically; the dark 
side of the planet, which receives no heat from the 
Sun, would be extremely cold. 

If the planet does not always turn the same face 
to the Sun, the effect of its rotation would be to 
lower the noonday temperature and to raise the 
night temperature; the noonday temperature would 
be lowered because no point of the surface would 
have the Sun in its zenith for more than a short 
time and the night temperature would be higher 
because the cooling off of the surface that had been 
heated by the Sun in the daytime would be gradual. 
The faster the rotation, the smaller would be the 
difference between the day and night temperatures. 
For a sufficiently fast rotation, there would be no 
difference between day and night temperatures 
at any place on the planet; there would be, how- 
ever, a variation of temperature with latitude, 
because the average rate of reception of heat from 
the Sun depends on the latitude. The average 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION 73 

temperature over the whole surface under these 
conditions can be estimated. 

Suppose the planet to be at the distance of the 
Earth and its radius to be r yards. The planet is 
receiving energy from the Sun at the rate of 1-54 x 
?rr 2 horse-power, because the cross-sectional area 
exposed to the radiation is Ttr 2 . If the distance 
of the planet from the Sun is R times the distance 
of the Earth from the Sun, the corresponding rate 
is 1-54 X 7rr 2 /R 2 horse-power. The total radiation 
of energy from the whole surface (4^r 2 ) is given, 
in terms of the temperature T, by Stefan's law. 
Equating the energy received with the energy 
radiated, we obtain T = 277/VR, expressed on 
the absolute scale. It may be noted that the average 
absolute temperature under these conditions will 
be equal to the maximum temperature previously 
found, divided by V2. The average temperature 
for the Earth under these conditions would be 277 
K or 4 C. 

The temperature on a planet that possesses an 
atmosphere cannot be so readily calculated, be- 
cause complex meteorological effects come into 
play and, as is well known on the Earth, tempera- 
tures at any one place may differ considerably 
from day to day. The general effect of an atmo- 
sphere is nevertheless readily seen to be a smoothing 
out of the temperature differences between day 
and night, because there will be a persistent 
tendency for heat to be carried from the warmer to 
the cooler parts of the surface by warm air moving 
into colder regions and cold air moving into 
warmer regions. 



74 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

The temperature at the surface of a planet is 
influenced by its atmosphere in another way. 
The atmosphere of the Earth, and probably also 
most planetary atmospheres, are opaque in many 
regions of the infra-red, corresponding to long 
wave-length radiations. Most of the solar heat 
is transmitted by the atmosphere, warming the 
surface of the planet; much of this heat is radi- 
ated again as radiation of considerably longer 
wave-length, to which the atmosphere is opaque. 
The temperature is therefore raised considerably. 
By preventing the escape of the radiations of long 
wave-length, the atmosphere exerts a blanketing 
effect and the fall of temperature at night becomes 
less rapid; the diurnal range of temperature is 
therefore appreciably reduced. 

The table on p. 76 gives a comparison between 
the measured temperatures and the temperatures 
estimated on the two hypotheses mentioned above. 
The second column gives the directly measured 
temperatures; the third column gives the average 
temperatures on the assumption that there is no 
diurnal variation of temperature; the fourth 
column gives the maximum temperature on the 
sunlit face, assuming that the same face is always 
turned to the Sun. The planets are arranged in 
the table in the order of increasing distance from 
the Sun, and therefore also of decreasing tempera- 
ture. If the distance of the Earth from the Sun 
is represented by one foot then, on the same 
scale, the distances of the other planets are 
approximately as follows: Mercury, 4^ inches; 
Venus, 8 inches; Mars, 18 inches; Jupiter, 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION 75 

5 feet; Saturn, gf feet; Uranus, 19 feet; Neptune, 
30 feet; Pluto, 40 feet. 

The radiation received on the Earth from the 
planets can be measured with the aid of a large 
telescope, to gather as much of the radiation as 
possible, in conjunction with a sensitive detector 
of radiation. For detecting and measuring the 
radiation a bolometer or a thermocouple may be 
used. In the bolometer the radiant energy is 
focused on to a minute strip of platinum, which 
forms one arm of an electrical circuit known as a 
Wheatstone's bridge. A similar strip, shielded 
from the radiation, forms a second arm of the 
bridge, which is balanced against the first. When 
the radiant energy falls on the first arm of the bridge, 
it is heated, its resistance is increased, the balance 
of the bridge is upset and a current flows through 
the galvanometer of the bridge. The deflection of 
the galvanometer provides a measure of the 
intensity of the radiation falling on the bolometer. 
The thermocouple consists of a small junction of 
two^ minute strips of different metals; when the 
junction is heated a thermoelectric current, whose 
strength is proportional to the intensity of the 
radiation, flows through the circuit and is measured 
by a sensitive galvanometer. A highly sensitive 
thermocouple will detect the heat from a candle at 
a distance of three miles. 

The thermocouple or bolometer provides a 
measure of the total radiation from the planet, as 
modified by absorption in the Earth's atmosphere. 
A correction must be applied to the measures to 
allow for this effect, but we need not enter into the 



76 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

details of this correction. When it is applied we 
obtain a measure of the total planetary radiation, 
which consists in part of reflected sunlight and in 
part of the low-temperature long-wave radiation 
from the planet itself. It is the latter portion that 
provides information about the planet's tempera- 
ture and it is necessary, therefore, to separate it from 
the portion that is merely reflected sunlight. The 
separation is easily effected by placing a small 
transparent vessel containing water in the path of 
the rays. The water transmits the portion of the 
radiation of relatively short wave-length the 
reflected sunlight portion but is opaque to the 
long- wave planetary portion. We are thus enabled 
to measure the true heat radiation from the planet. 
The measured temperatures are given in the second 
column of the table. 



PLANETARY TEMPERATURES 

Measured 



Mercury (mean, sunlit side) 
Venus (bright side) 
Venus (dark side) 
Earth . . . 

Moon (centre of sunlit side) 
Moon (centre of dark side) 
Mars (hottest portions) . 
Jupiter (average) 
Saturn (average) . 
Uranus (average) . 
Neptune 
Pluto .... 



400 
55 

20 

I20J 

-ISO/ 
20 

- I 4 

- 155 

< 180 



Calculated 
I II 



172 

54 

4 
4 



183 

210 
222 
229 



358 



43 

100 

184 

2OI 
211 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION 77 

It will be noted that in general the measured 
temperatures lie between the temperatures given 
in columns three and four, and that there is a close 
general agreement between the estimated tem- 
peratures and those that are actually observed. 
The measured temperatures will be commented 
upon in subsequent chapters when dealing with the 
individual planets. 



CHAPTER IV 

THE EVOLUTION OF THE 
ATMOSPHERE OF THE EARTH 

IN the last chapter we found that the loss of atmo- 
sphere from a planet will be very rapid if the 
velocity of escape from the planet is less than four 
times the average velocity of the molecules and that 
the atmosphere will be practically immune from 
loss if the velocity of escape is more than five times 
the average velocity of the molecules. Let us apply 
these conclusions to the Earth and see whether the 
atmosphere of the Earth is in accordance with 
expectations. 

The velocity of escape from the Earth is 7-1 miles 
a second. Any component of the atmosphere, 
whose average molecular velocity is less than about 
i -4 miles a second, should therefore be practically 
immune from loss. The average molecular velo- 
cities for different gases are given on p. 56; it 
will be seen that they are all less than the critical 
value of 1*4 miles a second. These velocities 
correspond to a temperature of oG.; for higher 
temperatures the velocities will be greater. The 
temperatures that occur on the Earth at the present 
time are not great enough, however, to bring the 
average molecular velocity of hydrogen to a value 
as great as i -4 miles a second ; this velocity requires 
a temperature of 88 C. 

It appears, then, that the atmosphere of the 
Earth should be immune from the loss of hydrogen 

78 



EVOLUTION OF THE ATMOSPHERE 79 

at the present time and, therefore, immune also 
from the loss of all other gases. The Earth should, 
therefore, have retained the whole of its initial 
atmosphere, unless the rate of loss of the atmo- 
sphere soon aftqjr the Earth was formed, during the 
period when the Earth was very much hotter than 
it now is, was so rapid that in the course of a few 
thousand years much of the atmosphere was lost. 
There is evidence, which we shall consider presently, 
that such a loss did indeed occur. 

The estimated composition of the atmosphere, 
by volume and by weight, according to the figures 
given by Humphreys, is as follows: 

COMPOSITION OF EARTH'S ATMOSPHERE 



Constituent 


Volume, per cent, of 
dry air, at surface. 


Weight in units of 
100 million tons. 


Total atmosphere 






_ 


50,293,000 


Dry air 








100-00 


50,162,360 


Nitrogen . 








78-03 


38,111,360 


Oxygen 








20-99 


11,413,080 


Argon 








0-9323 


609,040 


Water-vapour 











130,490 


Carbon dioxide 








0-03 


2I,3l6 


Hydrogen 








O-OI 


1,270 


Neon 








0-0018 


678 


Krypton 








o-oooi 


126 


Helium 








0-0005 


79 


Ozone 








0-00006 


29 


Xenon 








0-000009 


17 



In addition, there are varying quantities of 
impurities such as sulphur compounds, ammonia, 
nitric and nitrous acids, particles of salt from the 



PLATE t 

THE MOON: REGION OF COPERNICUS 

Copernicus is the large crater at the centre of the 
photograph. It has a diameter of 56 miles. The 
mountain-ring, which reaches a height of 11,000 feet 
above the floor of the crater, falls gradually on the 
outside but very precipitously, with deep ravines, on the 
inside. The white streaks or rays, which radiate from 
Copernicus, are well shown ; it will be noticed that they 
pass over mountains and across craters. 

To the right of Copernicus are some hundreds of 
small craters, about 400 to 500 feet in diameter, many 
of which are arranged in rows. 

The range of mountains in the upper left-hand por- 
tion of the photograph is known as the Carpathians. 

Photographed by Dr. J. H. Moore and Mr. J. F. 
Chappell, with the 36-inch refractor, Lick Observatory, 
1937, October 26. 



PLATE 7 

THE PLANET JUPITER 

The upper portion of the plate shows two drawings 
of Jupiter by Rev. T. E. R. Phillips. The left-hand 
drawing was made on 1908, April 24, and shows 
Satellite III (Ganymede) as a dark spot in transit across 
Jupiter. The drawing shows the common appearance 
of the Red Spot, seen as a prominent oval near the 
satellite, during conjunction with the South Tropical 
Disturbance. The right-hand drawing was made on 
J 933> March 9. It shows Satellite I (lo) partly occult- 
ing its shadow, near the left-hand limb of the planet's 
disk. Satellite IV (Gallisto) is shown in transit on the 
lower part of the disk and casting its shadow on the disk. 

These two drawings show nearly the same presenta- 
tion of the planet and illustrate the changes in the 
markings, which are atmospheric markings and not 
surface details. 

In the lower portion of the plate tv/o photographs of 
Jupiter taken by Dr. Jeffers with the 36-inch refractor 
of the Lick Observatory on 1939, October 13 (left) and 
October 21 (right). These photographs show clearly 
the complex system of dark belts on Jupiter. In the 
right-hand photograph the Red Spot may be seen above 
and to the left of the centre. 



82 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

evaporation of sea spray, particles of soot, fine 
dust, and pollen of many varieties. 

The existence of the rare gas, argon, in the 
atmosphere was discovered by Lord Rayleigh and 
Sir William Ramsay in the year 1894. It may 
appear surprising that, although one per cent, by 
volume of the air we breathe is argon, this gas 
was not discovered at a much earlier date. The 
reason is that argon is a very inert gas and does not 
form chemical compounds, so that its existence was 
not recognised. It will be seen from the above table 
that the weight of argon in the atmosphere is several 
times the total weight of the water-vapour, carbon 
dioxide, and every other atmospheric constituent, 
except the two principal constituents, nitrogen and 
oxygen. In the years 1895-98, shortly after the 
discovery of argon, Sir William Ramsay and his 
assistant, Travers, discovered the four other rare 
gases, helium, neon, krypton and xenon. 

Helium, as previously mentioned, is the only 
substance that was discovered in the Sun before it 
was found on the Earth. First discovered on the 
Earth by Ramsay as a constituent of the atmosphere, 
it was later found to be present in cleveite and other 
uranium- and thorium-bearing minerals; helium 
gas, given off by such minerals, is collected from 
certain bore-holes in the United States. Helium 
being the lightest gas with the exception of hydro- 
gen, and not forming an inflammable mixture with 
air, has been used for filling the balloons of air- 
ships. 

Argon is obtained today in a state of compara- 
tive purity from commercial oxygen-distilling 



EVOLUTION OF THE ATMOSPHERE 83 

apparatus and some ten million cubic feet are used 
each year for filling electric-light bulbs, the so- 
called gas-filled bulbs, because the efficiency of 
the lamp is thereby increased and its life is pro- 
longed. Neon is extensively used for advertising 
signs. Krypton and xenon have not been used 
much for commercial purposes but they may 
eventually be used in electric-light bulbs, as they 
increase the efficiency of the lamp still further. 

The amount of water-vapour in the atmosphere 
is very variable, depending upon temperature and 
other conditions. Near the Earth's surface, the 
proportion of water-vapour by volume may vary 
from a mere trace to about five per cent, on hot days 
of very high humidity. The water-vapour is 
found only in the lowest layers of the atmosphere; 
there is very little above a height of five miles, be- 
cause of the low temperature at the higher levels. 
If all the water-vapour in the Earth's atmosphere 
were condensed, the condensed water would be 
sufficient in amount to cover the whole of the 
surface of the Earth to a depth of about one 
inch. 

The composition of the atmosphere in its lower 
layers, up to a height of about ten miles, is practi- 
cally constant, except for the water-vapour con- 
tent; in this region there is continual mixing of the 
constituents by convection and the action of 
turbulence. In the upper regions of the atmosphere 
there is very little vertical movement and the distri- 
bution of the constituents is therefore controlled 
by the action of gravity. The percentage of the 
lighter gases must, therefore, increase in the upper 



84 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

regions, and at the highest levels hydrogen and 
helium must be the principal constituents. 

It is not possible to state how high the atmo- 
sphere extends above the surface of the Earth. 
The density of the atmosphere decreases with 
height, gradually thinning out until empty space 
is reached; but there is no sudden transition from 
air to empty space. Shooting stars become 
visible at heights of from 70 to 100 miles; these 
small bodies, which enter the Earth's atmosphere 
from outside, are not seen until the friction caused 
by their rapid motion through the air heats them 
to such an extent that they become incandescent. 
The aurora borealis, or northern lights, gives evi- 
dence of the extension of the atmosphere to much 
greater heights. The auroral light is an electrical 
phenomenon, caused by the entrance of electrified 
particles into the atmosphere. By taking photo- 
graphs of the aurora from two places, some miles 
apart, the height can be found. The lower edge 
of the aurora is usually at a height of some 60 or 70 
miles; the highest portions have been found to 
extend to heights as great as 500 to 600 miles. 
The density at such heights is so extremely small 
that we may regard the effective limit of the atmo- 
sphere as being about 600 miles above the surface. 
If the atmosphere were compressed so that it was 
of uniform density throughout, the density being 
equal to the actual density at the surface, it would 
extend to a height of only 5^ miles; this is called the 
height of the equivalent atmosphere. 

It is of some interest to note that the total weight 
of the Earth's atmosphere is rather less than a 



EVOLUTION OF THE ATMOSPHERE 85 

one-millionth part of that of the Earth itself and 
that the weight of the atmosphere is equivalent 
to that of an ocean of water covering the whole of 
the Earth's surface to a depth of about thirty-three 
feet. The least abundant of the constituents, 
xenon, if loaded on railway wagons, each carrying 
ten tons, would require a train to carry it that would 
extend eighty times around the Earth's equator. 
Travelling at twenty miles an hour, such a train 
would take twelve years to pass by. 

We have seen that helium is present in the 
atmosphere to the extent of about five parts in one 
million by volume. Helium is being continually 
added to the atmosphere by the process of the 
weathering of the igneous rocks of the Earth's crust, 
which contain uranium and thorium. In any 
mineral or rock that contains these elements, 
radioactive disintegrations are continually taking 
place, one result of the break-up of these heavy 
atoms being the formation of helium. Some of the 
helium so produced remains inside the minerals 
and rocks and some escapes into the atmosphere; 
the proportion that escapes depends on various 
geological factors. When such rocks are decom- 
posed by weathering, the whole of their helium 
escapes into the atmosphere. It has been estimated 
that the atmosphere does not now contain more 
than a fraction of the amount of the helium that it 
has gained during geological times in the process 
of the formation of the sedimentary rocks as a 
result of the weathering of the igneous rocks. It 
must be concluded that much of the helium that 
has been added to the atmosphere in this way has 



86 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

somehow escaped; the suggestion has been made 
that there may be at the present time an approxi- 
mate balance between the amount of helium that 
is still being added in the way we have described 
and the amount that is being lost. 

It may be objected that the loss is, possibly, only 
apparent and that the helium, being a light gas, 
has become concentrated in the upper regions of 
the atmosphere where little or no mixing up of the 
constituents can occur by convection. There is 
direct evidence, however, that the upper atmo- 
sphere cannot be rich in helium because the 
spectrum of light from the aurora, which comes 
from a height of something like sixty miles, shows 
the presence of oxygen and nitrogen but not that of 
helium. 

Even if the Earth had remained sufficiently hot 
in the early stages of its existence for a time long 
enough for the hydrogen and helium then present 
in its atmosphere to escape entirely, it still remains 
to explain how helium continues to be lost when, 
according to the theoretical conclusions already 
mentioned, which are based on the accepted prin- 
ciples of the kinetic theory of gases, it should not be 
possible for it to escape. There is one process by 
which the escape of helium can be brought about. 
It is well known that the night sky is faintly lumin- 
ous. In addition to the light from the stars there is 
a faint luminescence from the upper atmosphere, 
whose brightness seems to vary with the sun-spot 
cycle, being greater at sun-spot maximum than at 
sun-spot minimum. Lord Rayleigh has termed 
this luminescence the non-polar aurora. In the 



EVOLUTION OF THE ATMOSPHERE 87 

spectrum of this faint light from the night sky, 
obtained by taking long exposures with special 
spectographs of small dispersion, the characteristic 
green and red lines that occur in the spectrum of 
the bright aurora borealis are always present. 
These particular lines are known to be produced by 
radiations from atoms of oxygen that are in a 
special condition, which the physicists term a 
metastable state. An atom, when excited or loaded 
up with energy, usually unloads its energy within 
a short interval of time of the order of one hundred- 
millionth of a second ; this unloading of the energy 
corresponds to the emission of radiation. A meta- 
stable state, on the other hand, is characterised by 
the peculiarity that the atoms in that state do not 
have a very strong inclination to unload their 
energy : they may remain for an average time of a 
second or longer before emitting their energy in 
the form of radiation. But collisions between the 
atoms are so frequent that there is a high proba- 
bility that before an atom in the metastable state 
emits its energy as radiation it will have collided 
with another atom. Whenever a collision of a 
metastable oxygen atom with another atom occurs, 
the energy of the oxygen atom which in due 
course would have been emitted as radiation is 
immediately unloaded and is converted into kinetic 
energy. Instead of being emitted as radiation, it is 
used in making the two colliding atoms rebound 
with a greatly increased speed. The amount of 
energy that is unloaded in this way when another 
atom collides with a metastable oxygen atom can 
be computed. It is found that if the colliding 



88 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

atom is an atom of helium the energy is sufficient to 
enable the atom of helium to rebound with a speed 
of more than seven and a half miles a second. As 
this speed is greater than the velocity of escape from 
the Earth, the atom of helium has a chance of 
escaping, which it would not otherwise have. 
Hydrogen atoms would acquire a still greater speed 
and could also escape. Heavier atoms, such as 
those of nitrogen and oxygen, though they would 
receive an equal amount of energy by the collisions, 
would not acquire such large velocities ; they would 
not rebound with a speed greater than the velocity 
of escape. The loss of hydrogen and helium from 
the atmosphere of the Earth at the present time is 
thus made possible by this special process, depend- 
ing upon the fact that free oxygen is present in the 
atmosphere. It is possible in this way to explain 
satisfactorily why the amount of helium in the 
atmosphere at the present time is less than we should 
have expected. 

There is strong evidence that the present atmo- 
sphere of the Earth is not its original atmosphere 
and that the primitive Earth must have remained 
hot sufficiently long for most of the initial atmo- 
sphere to have been lost. This evidence is provided 
by the comparison between the relative abundance 
of different elements on the Earth and the relative 
abundance of the same elements in the Sun and 
the stars. We must here anticipate a subject that 
will be discussed more fully in a later chapter. It 
is believed that the Earth, in common with the other 
planets in the solar system, was formed from matter 
drawn out from the Sun by the gravitational action 



EVOLUTION OF THE ATMOSPHERE 89 

of another star that passed close by the Sun. If 
this was so, and there is no satisfactory alternative 
theory to account for the origin of the solar system, 
we should expect that the composition of the Earth 
would be generally similar to that of the outer layers 
of the Sun. 

The investigation of the chemical composition of 
the atmosphere of the Sun is based upon the study 
of its spectrum; the number of atoms needed to 
produce a line of given intensity in the spectrum of 
the Sun can be estimated. The composition of the 
Earth is estimated from the actual analysis of 
typical rock samples, the results being combined in 
proportion to the relative amounts of the different 
kinds of rocks, as inferred from geological evidence. 
This information is supplemented by information 
about the interior of the Earth provided by the 
study of seismograph records of earthquakes, which 
provide information about the propagation of the 
earthquake waves through the interior of the Earth, 
and hence about the nature of the interior. There 
are, naturally, uncertainties attaching to both 
methods, because in neither case is the available 
data as complete as we should like. The com- 
parison of the conclusions from the two entirely 
different methods of investigation is, nevertheless, 
of great interest. The most reliable information 
about the composition of the atmosphere of the 
Sun is obtained for the metallic elements. Russell 
gives the following table, in which the fourteen 
most abundant metals in the Sun, found from 
his investigation of the Sun's spectrum, are com- 
pared with the fourteen most abundant metals 



9O LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

in the Earth, as indicated by the work of Gold- 
sehmidt: 

COMPARISON OF ABUNDANCE OF ELEMENTS IN EARTH AND SUN 

Group. Earth. Sun. 

I . Iron Magnesium 

Magnesium Sodium 

Aluminium Iron 

Nickel Potassium 

Calcium Calcium 

Sodium Aluminium 
Potassium 

II . . . Titanium Manganese 

Chromium Nickel 

Manganese Chromium 

Cobalt Cobalt 

Titanium 

III . . . Copper Vanadium 

Vanadium Copper 

Zinc Zinc 

In the above table, the elements are divided into 
three groups. The average abundance of elements 
in the first group is about ten times that of elements 
in the second, and the average abundance of ele- 
ments in the second group is about ten times that of 
elements in the third. 

The same fourteen metals appear in the two 
columns headed Earth and Sun and the grouping 
into the three groups is generally similar. 

The analysis of meteorites gives the following 
as the most abundant metallic elements: iron, 
magnesium, sodium, nickel, calcium, aluminium. 
The meteorites are probably fragments of matter 
drawn from the Sun when the planets were formed, 
which did not condense into planets. It will be 



EVOLUTION OF THE ATMOSPHERE gi 

noticed that the six most abundant metals in the 
meteorites are included in Group I in the list of 
most abundant metals in the Earth. 

The investigation has been extended to include 
the metals of lower abundance than those given in 
the above table; when the lists of relative abundance 
for the Earth and the Sun are compared, it is found 
that out of a total of forty-eight metals there are 
only four cases in which one list makes a given 
element more than ten times as abundant as the 
other, though some of these metals are a hundred 
thousand times more plentiful than others. The 
four cases of greatest discordance all relate to metals 
for which either the spectroscopic data for the Sun 
or the chemical data for the Earth are known to be 
rather uncertain. The conclusion drawn by Rus- 
sell from this detailed investigation is that " it is 
hard, indeed, to find a single case in which we can 
be sure that a given metal is more or less abundant 
in the Sun than on the Earth." 

This striking similarity in composition may be 
regarded as providing substantial evidence of a 
common origin. It is just what we might have 
anticipated if the Earth was formed from material 
that had been drawn out from the Sun. It is 
rather more surprising to find that a detailed in- 
vestigation of the spectra of the stars, made in a 
manner analogous to that used for the analysis of 
the spectrum of the Sun, shows that the composition 
of the stars is substantially similar to that of the Sun. 
This seems to suggest that the Sun and all the stars 
have themselves been formed from some primaeval 
material whose composition was everywhere more 



92 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

or less the same and that subsequent processes of 
building up more complex atoms out of simpler 
ones, or of the breaking up of the most complex 
atoms, have followed a generally similar course. 

When we turn from the metals to the non-metals 
we find an entirely different picture. The striking 
similarity between the composition of the Earth 
and that of the Sun and the stars no longer persists. 
Some remarkable differences are shown. Hydro- 
gen, for instance, is far more abundant in the Sun 
than in the Earth. At least 90 per cent, of all the 
atoms in the atmosphere of the Sun, and perhaps 
95 per cent, or more, are atoms of hydrogen ; 
there are some three hundred times as many atoms 
of hydrogen in the Sun as there are atoms of all 
the metals together. The number of atoms of 
hydrogen in terrestrial rocks is about equal to the 
average number of atoms of the six most abundant 
metals contained in the rocks : aluminium, iron, 
calcium, sodium, potassium and magnesium. It 
might be thought that the oceans would account 
for much of the terrestrial hydrogen, as each mole- 
cule of water contains two atoms of hydrogen ; but 
the oceans only contribute 239 parts by weight out 
of one million parts for the Earth as a whole. 

Another striking discordance is provided by 
nitrogen. Nitrogen is very abundant in the Sun, 
the stars and the nebulae. The nitrogen in the 
Earth's atmosphere amounts to about one part by 
weight in two million for the Earth as a whole; 
there is a little nitrogen in the igneous rocks and 
some may be dissolved in the liquid core of the 
Earth. But with ample allowance for such possi- 



EVOLU^MJN OF THE ATMOSPHERE 93 

bilities, nitrogen^must be at least some hundreds 
of times more abundant in the Sun and stars than 
in the Earth. 

Perhaps the most interesting discordances are 
those shown by the rare gases of the atmosphere, 
argon, neon, helium, krypton and xenon, because 
these are the rarest of all the elements on the 
Earth* Being very inert substances chemically, 
they do not combine with other elements to form 
compounds. With the exception of helium, which 
is continually being formed by the breaking up of 
the heavy radioactive elements, there is no reason 
to believe that these elements are present in the 
interior of the Earth; all that there is of them is 
contained in the atmosphere and how little there is 
of these elements in the atmosphere, argon alone 
excepted, may be seen from the table on p. 79, 
which gives the composition of the Earth's atmo- 
sphere. Some of these inert gases are known to have 
a high cosmic abundance. The amount of helium 
in the Sun is difficult to estimate with certainty but 
in the hotter stars, in whose spectra the lines due to 
helium are strong, helium is undoubtedly very 
abundant. It has been estimated that the abun- 
dance of helium on the Sun is about one hundredth 
of that of hydrogen , the terrestrial abundance is 
probably not more than one ten-millionth as great. 
Neon lines are strong in the spectra of the nebulae 
and the very hot stars, and it seems that the cosmical 
abundance of neon is some 500 million times greater 
than its terrestrial abundance. The discordance is 
not so marked for argon, whose cosmical abundance 
appears to be about equal to that of neon, whereas 



94 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

it is several hundred times more abundant on the 
Earth than neon. There is no information about 
the cosmical abundance of krypton and xenon. 

Of the gaseous elements that are present in the 
afmosphere of the Earth the least discordance 
between the solar and terrestrial abundance is 
shown by oxygen. Though it is not easy to estimate 
accurately the amount of oxygen in the Sun's 
atmosphere, the available evidence suggests that 
oxygen may be about equally abundant on the 
Earth and on the Sun. Most of this oxygen occurs, 
however, not in the free state in the atmosphere 
but in chemical combination. 

The similarity in the relative abundances of the 
metals in the Sun and Earth suggested a common 
origin. This common origin being accepted, the 
great differences in the relative abundances of the 
inert atmosphere-forming elements nitrogen, ar- 
gon, helium and neon force us to the conclusion 
that these gases have been to a very great extent 
lost to the Earth. It is reasonable to suppose that 
when the Earth was first formed these elements 
were as abundant in the Earth as they are in the 
Sun and the stars. Being elements that do not 
readily enter into chemical combination with other 
elements, when the Earth began to cool and the 
temperature had fallen sufficiently for chemical 
compounds to form, these gases remained to a large 
extent in the Earth's atmosphere. But the Earth 
at that time was still very hot, so that it was losing 
its atmosphere at a very rapid rate, and the lighter 
gases were naturally being lost at a faster rate than 
the heavier gases. When it had cooled to such an 



EVOLUTION OF THE ATMOSPHERE 95 

extent that the loss of its atmosphere practically 
ceased, neon had been depleted to a much greater 
extent than the heavier argon. The atomic weight 
of neon is twenty, whereas that of argon is forty, as 
compared with atomic weights of fourteen and 
sixteen for nitrogen and oxygen respectively. In 
this way we have a plausible explanation of why 
argon is five hundred times more abundant than 
neon in the atmosphere of the Earth, whereas in 
the Sun and in the stars, neon is as abundant as 
argon. 

The conclusion we have reached is that when the 
Earth had cooled sufficiently for the escape of its 
atmosphere practically to cease, almost all the neon 
that had been contained in the initial atmosphere 
had escaped. Much of the heavier argon had 
naturally escaped also, but the depletion of the 
argon was much less than that of the neon. Most 
of the original atmospheric oxygen, nitrogen and 
water-vapour, and almost all of the original 
helium and free hydrogen, must also have been lost, 
because these substances are lighter than neon. At 
this stage in its history, the Earth must have been 
almost devoid of an atmosphere. 

As the molten Earth cooled still further, great 
quantities of water-vapour, carbon dioxide and 
other gases must have been evolved from the liquid 
magma, when at length it solidified to form the 
crust. These gases, with the residual gases from 
the initial atmosphere, formed the new atmosphere 
which, as the Earth was then relatively cool, could 
not escape. This atmosphere differed from the 
present atmosphere of the Earth in that it con- 



PLATE 8 

THE PLANET SATURN 

In the upper portion of the plate is shown a photo- 
graph of Saturn obtained by Dr. Jeflfers with the 36-inch 
refractor of the Lick Observatory on 1939, October 21. 
The outer ring has an exterior diameter of 171,000 miles 
and a width of about 10,000 miles; the inner ring has an 
outer diameter of about 145,000 miles and a width of 
about 16,000 miles. The width of the division between 
the rings is about 3,000 miles. The feebly luminous 
inner ring is not shown in the photograph. The shadow 
of the ball of Saturn on the ring will be noticed. The 
belts of Saturn are shown, and it will be seen that they 
are much less well-defined than the belts of Jupiter. 

The lower portion of the plate shows photographs of 
Saturn taken in ultra-violet, violet, yellow, and red light. 
The differences in appearance are due to the different 
degrees of penetration of the light of different wave- 
length into the atmosphere of Saturn. The photographs 
were taken by Dr. W. H. Wright with the Grossley 
Reflector of the Lick Observatory, on 1929, August 
25-26. 

The different appearance of the rings at the two dates 
may be mentioned. In 1929 the rings were wide 
open, in 1939 they were viewed more obliquely. The 
appearance of the rings depends upon the elevation of 
the Earth above their plane, which can reach 27 as 
its maximum. When the Earth passes through their 
plane, the rings become almost invisible and appear 
like thin needles projecting from opposite sides of the 
planet. 




s 






CO 





PLATE 9 

THE SPECTRA OF THE MAJOR PLANETS 

The plate shows in succession, from top to bottom, 
the spectra of the Moon, Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus and 
Neptune. The scale of wave-lengths is indicated at the 
top (the unit in which the wave-lengths are expressed 
is the " tenth-metre " one-ten-thousand-millionth part 
of a metre so that a wave-length of 5,000 is equivalent 
to -00002 inch). The spectrum of the Moon is that of 
the sunlight reflected by the Moon. The absorption 
lines designated A, B by Fraunhofer are caused by 
oxygen in the atmosphere of the Earth; a is caused by 
moisture in the atmosphere of the Earth, C and F are 
caused by hydrogen in the Sun, D by sodium, E by iron 
and b by magnesium in the Sun. A, a, B, C are in the 
red, D is in the yellow, *, b are in the green and Fis in the 
blue. These absorptions are present also in the spectra 
of Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus and Neptune. Other 
absorptions will be noticed in the spectra of these planets 
which do not appear in the spectrum of the Moon. 
These are produced by the atmospheres of the planets. 
In the spectrum of Jupiter, just to the left of C, is a weak 
absorption caused by ammonia. It is faintly visible in 
the spectrum of Saturn but is not seen in the ^pectra of 
Uranus and Neptune. Other absorptions increase in 
strength from the spectrum of Jupiter to that of Neptune; 
they are all produced by marsh-gas (or methane). They 
are so intense in the spectra of Uranus and Neptune that 
the yellow and red regions of these spectra are almost 
entirely cut out. It is for this reason that these planets 
show their characteristic green colour. A thickness of 
25 miles of marsh-gas, at atmospheric pressure, is 
required to give absorptions as intense as those in the 
spectrum of Neptune. 

7 



98 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

tained a great amount of carbon dioxide and a 
great amount of water-vapour but not much 
oxygen. In course of time, as the Earth cooled 
still further, most of the water-vapour condensed 
out of the atmosphere and formed the oceans. 

It remains to explain how the change from the 
atmosphere, as it then existed, to the present 
atmosphere has been brought about. For more 
than a century it has been recognised that the 
presence of free oxygen in the atmosphere, which 
we are apt to take for granted, demands explana- 
tion. Oxygen is an element that is chemically 
very active. Whereas the rare gases in the atmo- 
sphere are chemically inert and do not form com- 
pounds with other elements, oxygen does not like 
to exist alone. It is always eager to join up with 
other elements to form oxides. The rusting of iron 
is an illustration, rust being merely iron oxide. 
Combustion is nothing more than a process of 
oxidation, as we have already explained, and can- 
not occur in the absence of oxygen : if a glowing 
piece of wood is placed in ajar containing oxygen, 
it will at once burst into flame, because the oxida- 
tion then proceeds at a greatly enhanced rate. 

Because of this preference of oxygen for com- 
bining with other elements rather than for existing 
alone, it must follow that processes are in continual 
operation that are depleting the store of oxygen in 
the atmosphere. One of the principal sources of 
depletion arises from the weathering of the igneous 
or basic rocks in the Earth's crust, a process leading 
to the formation of sedimentary deposits. The 
weathered material is carried down by streams and 



EVOLUTION OF THE ATMOSPHERE 99 

rivers and ultimately deposited on the sea floor as 
sand, clay or mud. The iron contained in the 
igneous rocks is not completely oxidised; the 
greyish hue of these rocks results from the iron being 
present mainly in the form of ferrous oxide, an 
oxide of iron in which the iron has not got the full 
complement of oxygen that it can hold. During 
the process of weathering fresh particles of rock are 
continually being exposed to the atmosphere and 
much of the ferrous oxide in the exposed parts 
becomes oxidised into ferric oxide, the red oxide of 
iron that is familiar to us as rust. It is the red ferric 
oxide that gives the characteristic red or brown 
colour to the weathered deposits. 

The amount of oxygen that has been withdrawn 
from the atmosphere by this process is very con- 
siderable. The weathering process may be a slow 
one, but it must be remembered that the total 
thickness of the weathered deposits during geolo- 
gical times amounts to at least three or four hundred 
thousand feet. It has been estimated that the 
amount of oxygen that has been abstracted in this 
way from the Earth's atmosphere during geological 
times is equal to about twice the quantity now 
contained in the atmosphere. It is clear, therefore, 
that some other process must be in operation, which 
is continually replenishing the oxygen and making 
good the loss. The vegetation over the surface of 
the Earth provides the agency by means of which 
this replenishment is brought about. The green 
plant absorbs carbon dioxide from the air, as we 
have already seen in Chapter II, and uses the 
energy from sunlight to decompose it, the energy- 



IOO LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

transformer being the green colouring matter, 
chlorophyll, contained in the plant cells. The 
carbon is used to build up the complex organic 
substances found in living plants, the oxygen being 
returned to the atmosphere as a by-product. 

We have, therefore, in continual operation, through 
the agency of the vegetation over the Earth's sur- 
face, the replenishment of the oxygen in the atmo- 
sphere at the expense of the carbon dioxide. The 
converse process is, however, also going on. 
Through the decay of vegetable matter and other 
organic materials, oxygen is absorbed and carbon 
dioxide is liberated. This carbon dioxide is again 
available for building up new plant cells. It may 
seem that we are arguing in a circle and that with 
two contrary processes in operation we have proved 
nothing and have got no nearer to explaining why 
the atmosphere now contains so much oxygen. 
This would be so if there were an exact balance 
between the two processes, but actually in geolo- 
gical times they have not balanced. Whenever 
organic matter is buried so that it cannot become 
oxidised and decay there is a net gain of oxygen to 
the atmosphere. Organic matter has in the past 
been buried on a large scale and has provided the 
coal measures and oil deposits of today. It seems 
probable that the present abundant supply of 
oxygen in the atmosphere has been provided at the 
expense of the carbon dioxide that it formerly con- 
tained, through the burial of the organic matter 
that now provides us with coal and oil. It has been 
estimated that if the coal, oil and other organic 
deposits could be unburied and completely burned, 



EVOLUTION OF THE ATMOSPHERE IOI 

the whole of the oxygen in the atmosphere would 
be used up. 

The Earth's atmosphere has thus passed through 
an evolution that is full of interest. The initial 
atmosphere, rich in hydrogen and helium, was 
largely lost whilst the Earth was still young and hot. 
A new atmosphere was provided as the Earth 
cooled. Still further cooling resulted in the forma- 
tion of the oceans. Then, through the action of 
vegetation, there has been the replacement of 
carbon dioxide by oxygen; the change from an 
atmosphere rich in carbon dioxide to an atmosphere 
rich in oxygen is accounted for by the burial of 
large quantities of vegetation, which have thereby 
been preserved from decay. 

This study of the evolution of the atmosphere of 
the Earth will be helpful when we come to investi- 
gate the atmospheres of the other planets. It sug- 
gests that the values of the velocities of escape at the 
present time will provide a guide to an estimate of 
the maximum amount of atmosphere that a planet is 
likely to have; we have obtained definite evidence 
that the Earth must have lost much of its initial 
atmosphere at a rapid rate whilst it was still hot; 
the possibility of this initial rapid loss must be 
borne in mind in the case of the other planets. We 
have learnt also that an abundance of oxygen and 
a scarcity of carbon dioxide is indicative of plentiful 
vegetation, whereas, in the absence of vegetation, 
we are likely to find an abundance of carbon 
dioxide and a scarcity of oxygen. 



CHAPTER V 



WORLDS WITHOUT 
ATMOSPHERES 

WHEN the velocity of escape from a planet is suffi- 
ciently small, the atmosphere will have been dissi- 
pated at a rapid rate, so that we should not now 
expect to find any traces of an atmosphere. These 
conditions are likely to be found on the small bodies 
of the solar system; for the velocity of escape is de- 
termined by the ratio of the mass to the radius of the 
planet, and though the mass is small for the planets 
of small size and large for the planets of large size, 
the mass is dependent upon the cube of the radius ; 
it follows that, apart from differences in mean 
density from one planet to another, the velocity of 
escape is proportional to the radius of the planet. 
It is, therefore, the small planets that will have 
the low velocities of escape. The figures given on 
p. 6 1 confirm this. 

Of the bodies listed there, the Moon has the 
lowest velocity of escape, viz. 1-5 miles a second. 
The observed maximum temperature on the Moon 
is I2OG.; at this temperature the average mole- 
cular speeds are twenty per cent, greater than the 
speeds at the temperature of o C., which are given 
for a selection of gases on p. 56. The criterion for 
the retention of an atmosphere tells us that at its 
present temperature the Moon could retain carbon 
dioxide and any heavier gases, but oxygen and all 
lighter gases including nitrogen, water- vapour, 

IO2 



WORLDS WITHOUT ATMOSPHERES 103 

helium and hydrogen would be lost. In the 
earlier stages of the Moon's history, when it was 
much hotter than it now is, the rate of escape of 
atmosphere must have been very rapid. Even at 
the present time the Moon would lose an atmo- 
sphere of hydrogen almost instantly. At a tem- 
perature of 1,000 C. it would lose an atmosphere 
of carbon dioxide in a few years. We may expect, 
therefore, to find that the Moon is now totally 
devoid of any atmosphere. 

The next lowest velocity of escape is that for 
Mercury, 2-4 miles a second. The observed 
average temperature of the sunlit side of Mercury is 
about 400 C., and at this temperature the average 
molecular velocities have 1-57 times their values at 
o C. At such a temperature, Mercury could 
retain atmospheres of carbon dioxide and oxygen 
but not of lighter gases. But since the maximum 
temperature on the sunlit side of the planet is appreci- 
ably higher than 400 C., the chance of retaining 
an atmosphere is less favourable than this suggests. 
If Mercury had remained for long at much higher 
temperatures before it cooled to its present state, 
it must also, like the Moon, have lost its atmosphere 
entirely. We can have little hope of finding any 
evidence of an atmosphere on Mercury. 

We come next to Mars, from which the velocity of 
escape is 3-2 miles a second and whose temperature 
is rather lower than that of the Earth. Mars could 
not at the present time retain either hydrogen or 
helium in its atmosphere, but it can retain water- 
vapour and heavier gases. Admitting a rapid loss 
of atmosphere in its early years, when its tempera- 



IO4 



LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 



ture was high, we must nevertheless conclude that 
Mars is likely to have retained a certain amount of 
atmosphere. The conditions are, however, some- 
what critical, and Mars is barely able to retain an 
atmosphere. It is a planet of particular interest 
and will be considered in detail in a later chapter. 

We have not hitherto made any mention of the 
satellites of planets other than the Earth. Mars has 
two satellites, Jupiter has eleven, Saturn has nine, 
Uranus has four and Neptune has one. Are any of 
these at all likely to possess an atmosphere ? They 
differ considerably in size; some, including the two 
satellites of Mars and the smallest satellites of 
Jupiter's large family, are not more than a dozen or 
so miles in diameter, whilst the largest slightly 
exceed the planet Mercury in size. It is certain 
that, with the possible exception of the few largest 
satellites, it is quite impossible for them to have 
retained any atmosphere at all. 

Particulars of the largest satellites are as follows : 



Planet. 


Satellite. 


Diameter 
(Moon = i). 


Mass 
(Moon = i). 


Velocity of , 
escape 
miles/sec. 


Jupiter 


lo 


I'D? 


I-Og 


i'5 


Jupiter 


Europa 


O-gi 


0-65 


i'3 


Jupiter 


Ganymede 


1-48 


2-10 


1-8 


Jupiter 


Gallisto 


i'49 


0-58 


0-9 


Saturn 


Titan 


I-2I 


1-86 


2'O 


Neptune 


(No name) 


1-4? 


? 


? 



The satellite of JSfeptune is too far away for its size 
to be known with any accuracy, but from its bright- 
ness it is estimated that it is not much inferior in 



WORLDS WITHOUT ATMOSPHERES 105 

size to Ganymede and Callisto, the largest of the 
satellites of Jupiter. Nothing is yet known about 
its mass. 

The velocities of escape from these satellites, 
given in the last column, may be compared with 
the velocity of escape from the Moon, 1-5 miles a 
second, and from Mercury, 2-4 miles a second. For 
three of the satellites the velocities of escape are 
equal to or are less than the velocity of escape from 
the Moon ; for the other two, the velocities are inter- 
mediate between the velocities of escape from the 
Moon and Mercury. The temperatures of these 
satellites are all very low, so that it would be pos- 
sible for them now to retain atmospheres of the 
heavier gases though gases lighter than water- 
vapour could not be retained. But they will have 
passed through a high- temperature stage, and if this 
stage had lasted for some time they must have lost 
their atmospheres entirely. If any of them has an 
atmosphere at the present time it must be extremely 
tenuous. 

The conclusions that we have reached about the 
atmospheres of the Moon and of Mercury have been 
based entirely on theoretical considerations. It is 
of interest to inquire whether these conclusions are 
confirmed by observation. The Moon is our 
nearest neighbour in space and can be studied in 
greater detail than any other celestial body. Its 
distance is only about a quarter of a million miles. 
Such a distance may seem large when we compare 
it with distances on the Earth; an aeroplane 
travelling without any stop at a speed of two 
hundred miles an hour would take seven weeks to 



IO6 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

reach the Moon. But, in comparison with most of 
the distances that are the concern of the astronomer, 
the Moon can properly be described as a near 
neighbour. It is so near that an object on the 
Moon of the size of St. Paul's Cathedral could just 
about be detected under favourable conditions. 

In the telescope the Moon appears as a rugged 
mountainous world. There are great mountain 
ranges on the Moon, the finest being the Apennines, 
shown in Plate 4, but the most prominent and 
characteristic feature of its surface is the great 
number of mountain rings, which cause large areas 
of the surface to have a sort of pock-marked ap- 
pearance. We are able to see only one half of the 
surface of the Moon, because the Moon always 
turns the same face towards the Earth, the other 
face being permanently turned away from us. This 
condition has been brought about through the 
action of the gravitational attraction of the Earth. 
When the Moon was young and its surface was still 
plastic, the attraction of the Earth raised a great 
tidal bulge on its surface; as the Moon rotated, this 
tidal bulge was dragged across it so as always to 
face towards the Earth. The dragging action 
formed a brake on the rotation of the Moon and 
gradually slowed it down until at length the Moon 
turned always the same face towards the Earth. 
An analogous effect is still slowing down the rotation 
of the Earth. The tides in the oceans, produced by 
the gravitational action of the Moon, act as a brake 
upon the Earth, causing a very slow but progressive 
lengthening in the day. The magnitude of the 
effect is small, the length of the day increasing in 



WORLDS WITHOUT ATMOSPHERES 107 

the course of a century by only two-thousandths of 
a second; but the effects are cumulative and will 
continue until eventually the Earth will always 
turn the same face to the Moon. When that hap- 
pens the length of the day will have increased to 
about forty-seven of our present days. 

The ring mountain formations on the Moon are 
commonly called craters, from their resemblance to 
the volcanic craters on the surface of the Earth, 
though they are on a much greater scale than the 
largest terrestrial craters. The largest lunar craters 
have a diameter of more than one hundred miles, 
but there are many others that do not measure 
more than a mile or two across. Small craters are 
often found within larger ones and, in many cases, 
the wall of one crater breaks through the wall of 
another, suggesting that they were formed at 
different times. The complexity of the topography 
of the Moon, and the extreme ruggedness of its 
surface, are well illustrated by the portion of the 
surface shown in Plate 5. The designation of these 
ring formations by the term crater is perhaps mislead- 
ing, because it suggests a definite volcanic origin, 
whereas it is by no means certain that they have 
been formed by volcanic action. One theory of 
their origin does suppose, however, that they are the 
result of volcanic activity. Many of the craters 
have a central peak and it is suggested that material 
was ejected from a central volcano and gradually 
built up the ring-shaped wall. The force of gravity 
is much smaller on the Moon than on the Earth 
and this would permit matter to be ejected without 
difficulty to great distances. There is, however, no 



IO8 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

essential difference in general structure between the 
largest and the smallest craters, and it' is difficult to 
understand how the largest craters, one hundred or 
more miles in diameter, could have been produced 
by volcanic action. Evidence of past volcanic 
activity on the Moon seems to be provided, never- 
theless, in another way, by the great plains or 
" seas " as they are commonly called; it is 
probable that these were once actual seas of 
lava and irregular ripple-like markings on them 
appear to indicate the limits of successive waves 
of lava flow. 

A different theory of the craters supposes that they 
were formed as the result of the bombardment of 
the Moon by gigantic meteors. There are a few 
examples of meteor bombardment to be found on 
the Earth's surface, the largest being the Great 
Meteor Crater in Arizona, a hollow about 600 feet 
deep and rather more than a mile in diameter, 
with a raised rim. It is possible that in the early 
stages of the Earth's history there was much more 
material, which had not been aggregated into 
planets, in the neighbourhood of the Sun than 
there now is, and that both the Earth and the Moon 
were subjected to intense meteoric bombardment. 
The Moon still bears the marks of this bombard- 
ment in its much-scarred surface; but the action of 
denudation by water and erosion by wind, with the 
formation of sedimentary deposits, and successive 
upheavals to form mountain ranges have long ago 
wiped away all the traces from the Earth's surface 
of the bombardment that it had once undergone. 
The few meteor craters that can be seen on the 



WORLDS WITHOUT ATMOSPHERES 

Earth at the present time are formations that are 
geologically young. 

Other formations of interest may be seen on the 
surface of the Moon. There are many straight 
clefts or crevasses, about half a mile or so in width, 
which run in more or less straight lines for hundreds 
of miles through valleys and across mountains. 
They appear to be cracks in the surface, caused by 
the contraction of the interior of the Moon. There 
are also many deep narrow valleys and some straight 
lines of cliff caused by faulting of the surface. The 
most puzzling of all the features are the light- 
coloured streaks or rays, which radiate radially 
from some of the craters and pass across valleys 
and mountains and over craters for distances of 
hundreds of miles. They are a few miles in 
breadth and do not appear to be elevated above 
the surface. The true nature of these rays is not 
known, through it has been suggested that the 
appearance is caused by the staining of the surface 
by vapours coming from narrow rifts. The rays 
from the great crater Copernicus are shown in 
Plate 6. 

The appearance of the Moon in the telescope, 
with its steep rugged mountains, jagged rocks and 
fault scarps, suggests a world where there has been 
no wearing away by erosion. It is quite certain 
that the Moon is a waterless world. Oceans, lakes 
and rivers would be clearly seen if they existed and 
at times they would reflect the sunlight and appear 
intensely bright. No clouds ever veil the Moon's 
surface. This is merely what we should expect if, 
as we have concluded, the Moon has no atmosphere. 



IIO LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

If there were any water on the Moon it would 
rapidly evaporate during the heat of the long lunar 
day and the water-vapour would be dissipated 
away into space. 

The absence of an atmosphere is indicated also 
in other ways. The telescopic appearance of the 
Moon itself proves that there cannot be more than 
the merest trace of atmosphere, for the parts of the 
Moon near the edge of the disk are as sharply 
defined as the other parts of the surface; if there 
were any atmosphere, the edge portions of the 
Moon would be seen through a much greater depth 
of atmosphere than the central portions and would 
be partially or even completely obscured. Further 
evidence is provided by observing the occultation 
of a star as the Moon passes in front of it. The 
Moon moves eastward across the sky relative to the 
stars; between New Moon and Full Moon the 
advancing edge is the dark one. When the dark 
edge passes in front of a star, the star retains its 
full brightness until it instantaneously disappears. 
There is no gradual fading away as there would be 
if the Moon had any atmosphere; at one moment 
the star is seen to be shining with its usual bright- 
ness; the next moment the star is not there. It is 
as though it had suddenly been completely blotted 
out of existence. And however often the observa- 
tion is made, the suddenness of the disappearance 
never ceases to cause surprise. Between Full Moon 
and New Moon the advancing edge is the bright 
one; a star that has been occulted then reappears 
with equally startling suddenness as the dark edge 
passes away from it. 



WORLDS WITHOUT ATMOSPHERES III 

We see the Moon by means of sunlight falling 
upon it which is reflected back by its surface. At 
any time one half of the surface is in sunlight and 
the other half in darkness. Near New Moon the 
sunlight is mostly falling on the hemisphere of the 
Moon that is turned away from us; near Full Moon 
it is mostly falling on the hemisphere that is turned 
towards us. This is the cause of the varying phases 
of the Moon. Though the Moon appears very 
bright, its surface is actually a poor reflector; less 
than ten per cent, of the sunlight that falls on it 
is reflected back, the remainder being absorbed 
and going to heat the surface. The reflecting 
power of the surface of the Moon corresponds to 
that of greyish-brown rocks. It may be remarked 
that the greyish colour of the Moon is suggestive 
of rocks that are incompletely oxidised and indicate 
the absence of oxygen; if oxygen were present on 
the Moon to oxidise the rocks completely, the 
colour of the Moon would be reddish, somewhat 
resembling the colour of Mars. 

The temperature of the Moon can be measured 
with the aid of a bolometer or thermocouple, as 
previously described. As we have just mentioned, 
most of the radiation that we receive from the Moon 
is merely reflected sunlight. The remainder is heat 
radiation radiation that has been absorbed by the 
surface rocks, which become heated and radiate like 
a brick wall that has been heated in the Sun. This 
heat radiation, characterised by its long wave- 
length, can be separated from the reflected sunlight, 
which is mainly of much shorter wave-length, and 
used to determine the surface temperature. During 



112 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

the long lunar day, equal to fourteen of our days, 
the surface rocks become very hot and the tem- 
perature near the equator of the Moon at noon is 
about I20C., considerably higher than the tem- 
perature of boiling water at the surface of the 
Earth (100 C.). The temperature falls rapidly as 
the altitude of the Sun decreases and by sunset it 
is already freezing hard, the temperature being 
then 10 G. (or 18 of frost on the Fahrenheit 
scale). The most rapid variations of temperature 
occur at the time of an eclipse of the Moon. As 
the Earth advances, throwing its shadow on the 
Moon and cutting off the sunlight from its surface, 
the temperature immediately begins to drop with 
startling rapidity. At one eclipse, for instance, it 
was found that the temperature of the surface 
dropped from +70 C. to 80 G. in a little more 
than an hour. During totality, which lasted 2^ 
hours, the temperature dropped a further 40 C. 
But after totality had ended, the temperature rose 
in an hour to almost its initial value. These 
extreme and rapid variations are what we should 
expect on a world that is entirely devoid of at- 
mosphere. We may compare these figures with 
the fall of temperature experienced on the Earth 
at points within the belt of totality on the occasion 
of a total eclipse of the Sun; the fall of temperature 
does not usually exceed two or three degrees. 

From what we have learnt of the Moon, and in 
particular from its lack of oxygen and water and 
from its extreme variations of temperature, we 
should naturally conclude that it is a world where 
life of any sort is entirely out of question. The 



WORLDS WITHOUT ATMOSPHERES 113 

Moon is the only world where we should expect 
actually to see clear evidence of life, if any existed. 
There is no doubt that if there were a lunar inhabi- 
tant equipped with a powerful telescope, he would 
be able to see many signs of human activity on the 
Earth. He would be able to watch the growth of 
greater London; he would see cities like New York, 
Sydney, Johannesburg and Ottawa springing up. 
He would be able to watch the formation of new 
lakes by the impounding of water by dams. He 
would see land-reclamation works in progress and 
the draining of the water from tracts such as the 
Zuyder Zee. The seasonal growth of vegetation 
and the melting of the snow over vast tracts of land 
with the advance of summer would be clearly 
visible to him. In the course of a few years he would 
undoubtedly obtain clear evidence not only of 
plant life on the Earth but also of human activity. 
So, in a similar way, if the Moon were inhabited 
by intelligent beings we should expect to find plenty 
of evidence of their existence. We can find none. 
The Moon shows no signs of change. There are 
not even seasonal changes of colouration, such as 
might be attributed to the growth of vegetation. 
Some astronomers have claimed, indeed, to have 
seen slight changes in certain regions, changes 
mainly of tint such as might be produced by the 
growth of lichens on rocks. But such changes have 
not been confirmed and are generally discredited. 
It seems that the observers have been misled by 
changes in the appearance of the surface detail 
with changing altitude of the Sun. No! it is not 
possible to admit that there is life of any sort on the 
8 



114 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

Moon. It is a world that is completely and utterly 
dead, a sterile mountainous waste on which during 
the heat of the day the sun blazes down with 
relentless fury, but where during the long night 
the cold is so intense that it far surpasses anything 
ever experienced on the Earth. 

These hard facts are conveniently ignored by 
those who believe that it would be possible to shoot 
a rocket, containing human beings, to the Moon 
from which the human explorers could land and 
explore some portion of the Moon's surface. The 
explorers would need to be encased in airtight suits 
and provided with oxygen apparatus to enable them 
to breathe. Even supposing that they could protect 
themselves against the great heat by day and the 
extreme cold at night, a worse fate might be in store 
for them unless their suits were completely bullet 
proof. For they would be in danger of being shot 
by a shooting star. The average shooting star or 
meteor, which gives so strongly the impression of a 
star falling from the sky, is a small fragment of 
matter, usually smaller than a pea and often no 
larger than a grain of sand. Space is not empty but 
contains great numbers of such fragments. The 
Earth, in its motion round the Sun, meets many of 
these fragments, which enter the atmosphere at a 
speed many times greater than that of a rifle bullet. 
The meteor, rushing through the air, becomes 
intensely heated by friction and is usually com- 
pletely vaporised before it has penetrated within a 
distance of twenty miles from the surface of the 
Earth. Many millions of these fragments enter our 
atmosphere in the course of a day, but the atmo- 



WORLDS WITHOUT ATMOSPHERES 115 

sphere protects us from them. On the Moon, 
however, they fall to the surface and so great is their 
number that the lunar explorers would run a con- 
siderable risk of being hit. 

The difficulties that would have to be encountered 
by anyone who attempted to explore the Moon 
assuming that it was possible to get there would be 
incomparably greater than those that have to be 
faced in the endeavour to reach the summit of 
Mount Everest. In two respects only would the 
lunar explorer have the advantage. In the first 
place movement would be less fatiguing because 
as the weight of the Moon is only about one-eightieth 
of that of the Earth the gravitational pull of fhe 
Moon is not very great. If the Moon had an 
atmosphere like that of the Earth, a golfer on the 
Moon would find that he could drive his ball for a 
mile without much difficulty and a moderate bats- 
man would hit sixes with the greatest of ease and 
perform feats that even Bradman might envy. 
The second advantage the lunar explorer would 
have over the climbers on Mount Everest would be 
the absence of strong winds to contend against. 
The Moon having no atmosphere, there can be no 
wind ; nor, of course, can there be any noise, for 
sound is carried by the air. The Moon is a world 
that is completely still and where silence, " a 
silence where no sound may be," prevails. 

We turn next to the planet Mercury, the nearest 
of the planets to the Sun. The year on Mercury, 
the time that is taken for Mercury to traverse its 
orbit around the Sun, is 88 of our days. The orbit 
of Mercury is much the most elliptical of any of the 



Il6 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

planets/ so that the distance of Mercury from the 
Sun varies rather widely in the course of its passage 
around the Sun. It ranges from about 28| million 
miles, when at its nearest, to about 43^ million miles 
when at its greatest distance. Mercury is the fastest 
moving of all the planets, its speed ranging from 
thirty-six miles a second, when it is at its nearest to 
the Sun, to twenty-four miles a second, when 
farthest away. It is, therefore, not inappropriately 
named after the winged-footed messenger of the 
ancient gods. 

Mercury turns always the same face towards the 
Sun, just as the Moon turns always the same face 
towards the Earth. In the course of its journey 
round the Sun, it therefore makes exactly one rota- 
tion about its axis. In other words, the length of 
the day (defined as the time taken by the planet to 
make one rotation about its axis) is equal to the 
length of the year. But the other use commonly 
made of the word day, as contrasted with night, 
ceases to have any meaning on Mercury. For a 
portion of the planet has perpetual day and 
another portion has perpetual night. If Mercury 
were always at the same distance from the Sun, 
exactly half of the planet would have perpetual day- 
time and the other half would have perpetual night- 
time. This condition is modified somewhat by the 
variation in the distance of Mercury from the Sun. 
About three-eighths of the surface has perpetual 
day and an equal area has perpetual night. In the 

1 We leave out of consideration the thousands of minor planets or 
asteroids which circulate round the Sun between the orbits of Mars 
and Jupiter. 



WORLDS WITHOUT ATMOSPHERES 117 

intermediate zone, embracing about one-quarter of 
the surface, the Sun alternately rises above the 
horizon and falls below it. 

The temperature of the portion of Mercury that is 
perpetually bathed in sunlight is very high, about 
400 C., a temperature considerably higher than 
that at which lead melts and close to the tempera- 
ture required for zinc to melt. The opposite side, 
which never receives any sunlight at all, must be 
intensely cold. In the zone between, which has 
alternately sunlight and darkness, the variations of 
temperature must be extremely great. 

We have seen that there is little expectation of any 
atmosphere on Mercury. Though, at the present 
time, Mercury could hold an atmosphere com- 
posed of the heavier gases, the atmosphere must 
have escaped entirely if Mercury had remained very 
hot for any length of time after its formation. We 
have already concluded that the Earth, where 
conditions are much less favourable for the escape 
of an atmosphere, must have lost most of its original 
atmosphere whilst it was still hot. It is just possible 
that though Mercury lost all its original atmosphere, 
gases were given off by the crust as it solidified and, 
if so, Mercury may possibly now have an extremely 
tenuous atmosphere of carbon dioxide. 

It is not easy to find out anything very definite 
about conditions on Mercury by direct observation. 
Being near the Sun, Mercury is never visible for 
very long after sunset or before sunrise and it is 
comparatively seldom seen with the naked eye. 
The great astronomer, Copernicus, died without 
ever having seen it; he did not have the advan- 



Il8 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

tage of the optical aid provided by telescopes, 
which makes it possible for Mercury to be seen in 
broad daylight. But broad daylight does not 
usually provide favourable conditions for attempting 
to see any markings on the surface of Mercury. 

Exceptionally steady atmospheric conditions are 
required for the study of the surface of Mercury. 
In 1882 an Italian astronomer, Schiaparelli, began 
to make a systematic study of this planet, and in 
1889 he announced that there were markings on the 
surface, which were of a permanent nature and 
which indicated that Mercury always turned the 
same face to the Sun. The markings were ill- 
defined and gave the surface a spotty appearance. 
Subsequent observations by other observers have 
confirmed Schiaparelli's observations in their broad 
essentials, though there are considerable differences 
between the markings recorded by different ob- 
servers. This is not surprising, for the observations 
are of extreme difficulty. There is, nevertheless, 
general agreement about the main features, and it 
seems reasonably certain that the markings are due 
to irregularities of the surface as in the case of the 
Moon. It is possible that the surface of Mercury 
bears a general resemblance to the mountainous 
surface of the Moon. 

Difficult as it is to observe the surface markings of 
Mercury, it is far more difficult to obtain any certain 
evidence of an atmosphere. The reflecting power 
of Mercury, is about equal to that of the Moon. If 
there was much atmosphere, Mercury would un- 
doubtedly reflect a good deal more of the sunlight 
that falls upon it. Observations of the changes of 



WORLDS WITHOUT ATMOSPHERES Iig 

brightness of the planet with changes of phase 
suggest that there can be little or no atmosphere, 
and that the light is reflected from a rough surface, 
like that of the Moon. 

It sometimes happens that Mercury passes 
directly between the Earth and the Sun; it may 
then be seen projected on the Sun's disk as a small 
round black spot. The moments when it is entering 
on to, or leaving, the disk of the Sun provide 
favourable opportunities for detecting any atmo- 
sphere. At such times, if there were an appreciable 
atmosphere on Mercury, the portion of its disk 
outside the Sun would be surrounded by a bright 
line or halo, produced by the refraction of sunlight 
through the planet's atmosphere. Such a bright 
halo is seen when Venus is entering upon the Sun's 
disk, but it is not noticed in the case of Mercury. 
This observation provides definite evidence that, 
if there is any atmosphere on Mercury, it must be 
of extreme rarity. 

Some observers have felt confident, neverthe- 
less, that Mercury must have a thin atmosphere 
because, they assert, certain of the surface markings 
are obscured from time to time. The temperature 
is too high for any sort of condensation cloud to form 
above the surface and it has accordingly been 
suggested that the obscuration is caused by dust. 
It is possible that there may be active volcanoes on 
Mercury which eject clouds of dust to a great 
height at times of violent eruptions, and that there is 
a very thin atmosphere, sufficient to prevent the 
fine dust settling too rapidly. More will be 
learned in the future, we may hope, about this. 



I2O LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

The observations are extremely difficult and are not 
free from doubt. They need further confirmation. 
At present all that we can positively assert is that 
Mercury can have at the most an atmosphere of 
extreme rarity, and that the existence of such an 
atmosphere is not impossible on theoretical grounds. 

Whatever the final conclusion about the atmo- 
sphere of Mercury may be, there seems to be no 
possibility that life can exist on the planet. The 
high temperature over much of its surface, the very 
low temperature over other parts and the extreme 
variations of temperature over the intermediate 
zone, together with the absence of water-vapour and 
oxygen which must have been lost whilst Mercury 
was much hotter than it is at present combine to 
make conditions under which no form of life could 
survive. 

The two largest satellites of Jupiter, Ganymede 
and Callisto, are larger than the planet Mercury; 
the other two major satellites of Jupiter, lo and 
Europa, the largest of the satellites of Saturn, Titan, 
and the satellite of Neptune though smaller than 
Mercury are larger than the Moon. The velocities 
of escape from these bodies do not differ greatly 
from the velocity of escape from the Moon, and at 
their present temperatures they could just about 
retain water-vapour and heavier gases and vapours. 
But it is not possible to suppose that they have been 
very cold throughout their history and it is probable 
that their atmospheres were entirely or almost 
entirely lost whilst they were young and hot. 

Surface markings can be seen on some of these 
bodies and they all appear to turn the same face 



WORLDS WITHOUT ATMOSPHERES 121 

continually to the parent planet. They all have 
rather low mean densities; lo and Europa have 
mean densities nearly three times that of water; 
these two satellites are probably masses of rock like 
the moon. The mean density of Gannymede is 
slightly more than twice that of water, whilst that 
of Gallisto is only six-tenths that of water. These 
two bodies may consist largely of rock with a thick 
covering of ice or solid carbon dioxide. The very 
low mean density of Callisto may be spurious, as the 
mass of this satellite is difficult to determine and is 
somewhat uncertain; if real, it is difficult to explain 
unless we may suppose that its rocks are mainly in 
the form of pumice. 

The average temperatures of the satellites will 
not differ much from those of the parent planets 
because a planet and its satellites are at approxi- 
mately the same distance from the Sun. Reference 
to the table of temperatures on p. 76 shows that 
the large planets are extremely cold. These low 
temperatures would render the development of any 
form of life impossible. We may conclude that it is 
unlikely that any of the satellites in the solar system 
have an atmosphere; but in those cases where there 
may remain some doubt about the correctness of 
this assertion, the temperatures are certainly too 
low for the existence of life. Hence we can leave 
all the satellites out of consideration in our search 
for conditions in the solar system where life might 
conceivably exist. 



CHAPTER VI 

THE GIANT PLANETS 

THE four major planets, Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus 
and Neptune, are much larger and much more 
massive than the Earth. Their radii and masses, 
relative to the corresponding quantities for the 
Earth, are given in the table on p. 61. The same 
table gives the velocities of escape from these bodies. 
These velocities are all high and are, in fact, so 
much greater than the average molecular velocity 
of hydrogen that it is impossible for hydrogen, and 
therefore also for any of the heavier gases, to have 
escaped from their atmospheres, even if we suppose 
that they were initially much hotter than they now 
are. The giant planets must consequently have 
retained their initial atmospheres in their entirety. 
We may accordingly expect to find that they all 
possess dense and extensive atmospheres. For this 
reason they have many similarities, and it is 
convenient to consider them together. 

The nearest and the largest of these four planets 
is Jupiter, which is, therefore, the most favourably 
placed for detailed observation and study with the 
telescope. A small telescope is sufficient to show 
Jupiter as a fine-looking object. The apparent angular 
diameter of Jupiter varies from thirty- two seconds 
of arc, when it is at its greatest distance from the 
Earth (600 million miles), to fifty- two seconds when 
it is at its nearest (367 million miles). Even when it 
is at its greatest distance, a low magnification of 

122 



THE GIANT PLANETS 123 

sixty will make it appear in the telescope as large 
as the Moon appears to the naked eye. We sup- 
pose, then, that we are looking at Jupiter in a 
moderate-sized telescope. We see a bright disk, 
crossed by a number of dark markings arranged in 
more or less parallel belts. The disk is not circular 
in outline, but is distinctly flattened, the shortest 
axis being at right angles to the parallel belts. This 
flattening suggests a body that is in rapid rotation. 
If the flattening is produced by rotation, the shortest 
axis will be the axis of rotation; the belts are there- 
fore parallel to the equator of Jupiter. When we 
look attentively at the dark markings, we notice 
that they are not of a uniform structure and of 
sharply defined outline but that they show great 
complexity of structure and variety of detail. 
Fixing attention on any convenient well-defined 
object on the surface of the planet, we notice that it 
appears to move gradually across the surface. ^ This 
apparent motion is produced by the rotation of 
Jupiter on its axis. If we watched for a sufficiently 
long time, we should see the object disappear at one 
limb of Jupiter and after several hours reappear at 
the opposite limb; in rather less than ten hours 
from the commencement of the watch we should 
find that the object had returned to the same posi- 
tion on the disk that it occupied when the observa- 
tions commenced. We thus confirm the rapid 
rotation of Jupiter, which the flattened shape of the 
planet had caused us to suspect, and we find that 
the time of rotation is rather less than ten hours. 
Jupiter has, in fact, the shortest period of rotation 
of any of the planets. 



124 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

If our observations are made in the twilight, 
before the sky has become dark, we will notice that 
the centre of the disk is much brighter than the 
edge. This effect is much less noticeable at night, 
when the sky is dark, because the contrast in 
brightness between the limb and the dark sky then 
makes the edge portions of the planet appear sub- 
jectively relatively brighter than they really are. 
Precise measures of the brightness with a photo- 
meter show that the brightness begins to fall off 
rapidly near the edge of the disk and that at the 
edge the brightness is only about one-eighth that at 
the centre. This suggests that Jupiter has an atmo- 
sphere and that the falling off in brightness towards 
the edge is produced by the absorption of light in 
this atmosphere. In the case of the Sun, which is 
a gaseous body, there is a similar decrease in 
brightness from the centre to the edge of the disk, 
whereas the Moon, which is a solid body without 
an atmosphere, does not show any difference in 
brightness between centre and edge. 

If we were to embark on regular systematic 
observations of Jupiter we should soon find that 
the phenomena shown by the surface markings are 
of considerable complexity. It was noticed as long 
ago as the seventeenth century that the rotation 
period was not the same for all portions of the 
planet, the equatorial regions rotating faster than 
the polar regions. In other words, Jupiter is not 
spinning round on its axis like a solid body; this 
provides further evidence that the visible layers are 
not solid but that they must be gaseous or, possibly, 
liquid. A similar lack of uniformity in its rotation 



THE GIANT PLANETS 125 

is shown by the Sun, whose equatorial regions rotate 
considerably more rapidly than the polar regions. 
The period of rotation of the Sun at the equator is 
about 24! days, whilst at the poles it is about 34. 
days. But whereas the period of rotation of the 
Sun increases progressively from equator to poles, 
there is no corresponding regularity in the case of 
Jupiter. There are a number of different zones, 
each of which is pretty sharply defined and each of 
which has its own rate of rotation, with abrupt dis- 
continuities from one zone to the adjacent zones. 

The pioneer work in the systematic detailed study 
of these movements was made by a British amateur 
astronomer, Mr. Stanley Williams, who died in 
1938. He established the existence of a number of 
definite currents in the surface material; these cur- 
rents determine the rotation periods of the spots 
or markings that appear within them. Williams 
showed further that the currents were of a perman- 
ent nature, although from time to time there were 
temporary variations in the rates of their movement. 
The results obtained by Williams gave a great 
impetus to the study of the surface markings of 
Jupiter and the planet has been kept under system- 
atic observation by the devoted band of amateur 
observers that forms the Jupiter Section of the 
British Astronomical Association, pre-eminent 
amongst whom is the Rev. T. E. R. Phillips, who 
directed the work for more than thirty years. Two 
drawings of Jupiter by Mr. Phillips are reproduced 
in Plate 7, along with two photographs taken with 
the 36-inch refracting telescope of the Lick Observa- 
tory. 



126 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

These observations have confirmed the perman- 
ence of the eleven currents found by Williams. 
The most important of these is the great equatorial 
current, which covers a zone from 10,000 to 15,000 
miles wide and has a period of rotation of rather 
more than 9 hours 50 minutes. The periods of 
rotation of the other currents lie between 9 hours 
55 minutes and 9 hours 56 minutes, but bear no 
relation to the latitude. The distribution of the 
currents is different in the two hemispheres. The 
differences in period of rotation of the several cur- 
rents may seem to be not very large and they are, 
of course, very much smaller than the differences in 
the rates of rotation of the various portions of the 
Sun. But the differences are perfectly distinct and 
definite, so that well-marked features in adjacent 
currents may drift past one another, as the result of 
the different rates of movement of these currents, at 
a relative speed of as much as two hundred miles 
an hour. 

Though the different currents are permanent, 
their positions as well as their rates of rotation may 
vary from year to year. These variations have been 
well established by the observations of Williams, 
Phillips and others and are not to be attributed to 
errors of observation. The movement of the cur- 
rents and of the spots or other markings associated 
with them is usually almost entirely in a direction 
parallel to the equator, though from time to time 
spots have been observed whose movement is of a 
circulatory nature. 

Most of the markings to be seen on Jupiter are 
short lived. Some are merely transient, others may 



THE GIANT PLANETS 127 

lafct for a few weeks or, occasionally, for a few months. 
Their shapes show continual change. There can 
be little doubt that they are atmospheric pheno- 
mena of some sort. Their appearance suggests 
that they may be clouds, formed of droplets of 
condensed vapours, floating in the atmosphere of 
Jupiter. 

There are a few markings, however, that are of a 
much more permanent nature. The most remark- 
able of these is the great Red Spot. This marking 
was seen in 1878, and has been visible ever since, 
though its appearance changes so much that at 
some times it is very conspicuous and of a striking 
brick-red colour, whilst at other times it loses 
its colour and appears to fade away until it can 
scarcely be seen. It is normally oval in shape, 
extending some 30,000 miles in length and with a 
width of about 7,000 miles, the long axis being 
parallel to the equator; from time to time the shape 
changes and it becomes rounder. From a study of 
earlier drawings and observations of Jupiter it has 
been concluded that it was observed as far back as 
1831 and that it may well be identical with a mark- 
ing observed by Hooke in 1664. The appearance 
in 1878 came after a period of relative faintness. It 
was at one time thought that the Red Spot was a 
portion of the surface of Jupiter seen through a 
break in the clouds or that it was in some way 
attached or related to the solid surface; it has been 
suggested, for instance, that it might be a cloud or 
pall of smoke and dust hanging over an active 
volcano on Jupiter. But it has been found that 
the period of its rotation is subject to large and 



128 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

irregular variations, so that it is impossible that 
it can be related to the solid surface of the 
planet. 

Another remarkable marking is known as the 
South Tropical Disturbance. It is a dark region, 
some 45,000 miles in length, lying in the belt just 
south of the Red Spot, which was first seen in 1901. 
Its rotation is somewhat more rapid than that of 
the Red Spot, so that it overtakes the Spot at inter- 
vals which were at first about two years in length 
but which have gradually become longer, streaming 
past it at a relative rate of several miles an hour. 
When the disturbance is overtaking the Spot, its 
motion becomes accelerated and, in passing the 
Spot, it tends to drag the Spot along with it for 
several thousands of miles, the Spot then drifting 
back to its previous position. 

The belts on Jupiter are rich in colour, the colours 
being sometimes very vivid. Though red, brown 
and orange colours predominate, olive green and 
bluish patches may also be seen. The colouration 
of the belts is variable but the two hemispheres of 
the planet usually vary in an opposite manner. 
When the belts in one hemisphere show a maximum 
of redness, those in the other hemisphere are 
colourless or slightly bluish and conversely, whilst 
at intermediate times the predominant effect in 
both hemispheres is a moderate redness. 

It was thought until within fairly recent years 
that Jupiter was almost red-hot and that the bright 
colours seen in the belts were due to glowing 
vapours rising into the atmosphere from the almost 
molten mass. It was known, however, that Jupiter 



THE GIANT PLANETS 

was not sufficiently hot to be perceptibly self- 
luminous ; for from time to time one or other of the 
satellites passes between the planet and the Sun 
and, when this happens, the shadow of the planet 
is cast upon the surface; these shadows appear quite 
black, which they would not do if there was any 
appreciable glow from the surface. Observations 
within the last twenty-five years have proved that the 
belief that Jupiter is hot was ill-founded. Direct 
measurements have shown that most of the radiation 
that reaches us from Jupiter is merely reflected 
sunlight; the small portion that is true planetary 
radiation indicates that the temperature of the 
surface is very low, about 140 C. This tempera- 
ture is in close agreement with the temperature 
that would be expected for a planet at the distance 
of Jupiter from the Sun, if the surface were warmed 
only by the radiation from the Sun. It can be 
inferred that there is a close balance between the 
radiation that Jupiter receives from the Sun and 
the radiation that it re-emits to space, leaving little 
or no residuum to be accounted for by heat coming 
from the interior of the planet. 

The appearance of Saturn in the telescope, 
leaving the rings out of consideration, is generally 
similar to that of Jupiter. The surface is marked 
by bright and dark belts parallel to the equator. 
But whereas the belts of Jupiter are very irregular 
in outline, show a great deal of detail in the form 
of bright and dark spots, and undergo rapid 
changes, the belts of Saturn are regular in outline, 
are ill-defined and show little detail and have few 
spots or other irregularities. Information about 



130 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

the rotation period of Saturn and about the variation 
of the rotation with latitude is therefore not readily 
obtainable. From time to time, however, white 
spots appear, which may persist for some time. In 
1794 Sir William Herschel observed such a spot 
and was able to determine its period of rotation, 
which he found to be ten hours sixteen, minutes; 
the rotation of Saturn is therefore slightly slower 
than that of Jupiter. Other spots have been ob- 
served from time to time, at rather infrequent 
intervals. The most conspicuous spot ever observed 
on Saturn appeared in 1933 and was first seen by 
Mr. Will Hay in London. This spot, like the spot 
observed by Herschel in 1 794, was near the equator 
and the rotation period of the two spots were in 
close agreement. As with Jupiter, the higher the 
latitude the slower is the rotation, though the 
change with latitude is much greater for Saturn than 
for Jupiter. A spot discovered by Barnard in 1903 
in latitude 36 north gave a period of ten hours 
thirty-eight minutes. 

As in the case of Jupiter, the edges of the disk of 
Saturn are much less bright than the centre, 
suggesting the presence of a considerable atmo- 
sphere. The disk is also strikingly flattened, the 
axis of rotation being the short axis. The flattening 
is more marked than for Jupiter; Saturn is, in fact, 
much the most flattened of all the planets. This is 
another indication of an extensive atmosphere. 
Saturn shows colours which are not so strongly 
marked as those of Jupiter. The equatorial zone 
is usually of a bright yellow colour and there is a 
darkish cap, of a greenish hue, at the pole. The 



THE GIANT PLANETS 131 

measured temperature of Saturn is very low, 
155 C., some 15 C. lower than that of Jupiter, 
as would be expected from its greater distance from 
the Sun. 

It is the rings of Saturn that make it such a unique 
and striking object in the telescope. In the dis- 
cussion of conditions on Saturn, in relation to the 
possibility of the existence of life on the planet, 
we are not really concerned with the rings, which 
are not solid and could not be the home of life. 
It was shown in 1857 ^Y Clerk Maxwell that the 
rings could not continue to exist unless they were 
composed of a multitude of small particles : if the 
rings were solid, liquid or gaseous they would be 
unstable and would break up. The rings may 
therefore be considered as consisting of a great 
number of tiny moons, circulating around Saturn. 
The rule of the road that governs such motion 
under the controlling force of gravitation is that 
the outer lanes of traffic move more slowly than 
the inner lanes. That this is actually the case was 
proved by observation in 1895 by Keeler. The 
rings naturally do not show any marks that can be 
identified and used to serve as a measure of the 
rate of rotation; but the frequency or wave-length 
of the light received from a moving source depends 
upon its velocity and Keeler used this fact to 
investigate the rotation of the rings. There is little 
doubt that the fragments of which the ring system 
is composed are the remnants of a former satellite 
of Saturn, which approached too close to the planet 
and paid the penalty, being disrupted by the 
gravitational pull of Saturn. 



132 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

The remaining two major planets, Uranus and 
Neptune, are at such great distances from the Sun 
that we cannot learn much about them by direct 
telescopic observation. Uranus, at its mean dis- 
tance, has an angular diameter of nearly four 
seconds of arc, which is equal to the angular 
diameter of a halfpenny placed at a little less than 
a mile away. The angular diameter of Neptune is 
about half that of Uranus. Uranus can be seen 
with the naked eye on a clear dark night, appearing 
as a star of the sixth magnitude, but Neptune is 
too faint to be seen without telescopic aid. In the 
telescope both planets show small disks, which are 
of a sea-green colour. The disk of Uranus shows 
a decided oblateness; that of Neptune appears 
sensibly round. Extremely faint belts, parallel to 
the equator, have been seen on Uranus by several 
observers under particularly favourable conditions; 
they are suggestive of the belts of Saturn seen from 
a very great distance. There are no markings 
distinct enough to give a measure of the rotation 
period, but spectroscopic observations have given 
a value of above lof hours. This is probably a 
pretty correct value because it has been found that 
the brightness of Uranus is slightly variable in a 
period of ten hours forty minutes. The variations 
in brightness therefore synchronise with the rotation 
of the planet and suggest that if we could observe 
Uranus from a closer distance we should see marked 
differences in the belt structure in different longi- 
tudes. Neptune has a slower rotation period of 
fifteen hours forty minutes; it has the slowest 
rotation of any of the major planets. This rotation 



THE GIANT PLANETS 133 

period was measured by the spectroscopic method. 
Observations of the brightness of Neptune had 
shown that there was a small regular variation in 
about half this time seven hours fifty minutes. So 
short a period of rotation was difficult to fit in with 
some theoretical considerations of the orbit of the 
satellite of Neptune. It is now clear that there 
must be two portions of the surface of the planet, 
situated more or less on diametrically opposite sides 
of the planet, that are brighter than the remainder. 
From the same theoretical considerations the 
flattening of the planet can be inferred. It is found 
to be appreciable, though less than for the other 
major planets. The little that we can learn by 
direct observation about Uranus and Neptune 
suggests, as we should have anticipated, that there 
is a general similarity between these two distant 
planets and the two nearer major planets, Jupiter 
and Saturn. Measurement of the temperature of 
Uranus indicates that it is below 1 80 G.; 
Neptune must be still colder, but its temperature 
has not been determined by direct observation. 

The major planets can be weighed with consider- 
able accuracy because they all have one or more 
satellites. All that is required for this purpose is to 
know the period of revolution of a satellite about 
its parent planet and its distance from the planet; 
the universal law of gravitation enables us to infer 
the weight of the planet. Knowing also the size 
of the planet we can infer its mean density. In all 
the four major planets the mean density comes out 
surprisingly low. The mean density of the Earth 
is 5^ times that of water; the mean density of the 



134 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

Moon is less, being 3^ times that of water and 
suggesting that the Moon may have been formed 
from the less dense outer portions of the Earth. 
Some people believe that the Pacific Ocean, which 
is by far the most extensive of the oceans, marks the 
region where the Moon separated from the Earth. 
This theory must be looked upon with considerable 
suspicion, for there are very strong theoretical argu- 
ments which suggest that the Earth and the Moon 
could never have formed one body. The mean 
densities of Mercury, Venus and Mars all lie between 
the values for the Earth and the Moon. But when 
we come to the major planets we find appreciably 
lower values : the mean densities, in terms of that 
of water, for Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus and Neptune 
are respectively 1*34, 0-71, 1-27, 1*58. The low 
density of Saturn, less than three-quarters the 
density of water, is particularly surprising; it is only 
half the mean density of the Sun, which is a gaseous 
body. The mean densities being so much lower 
than the densities of any rocks and the planets being 
known to possess extensive atmospheres, the obvious 
explanation is that these atmospheres must have 
very great depth. An appreciable portion of the 
apparent diameter of these planets is consequently 
contributed by their deep atmospheres. Our ex- 
pectation that these massive planets must have 
extensive atmospheres is thus confirmed. 

The temperatures of the giant planets are 
extremely low. The moisture that must have been 
present in their atmospheres, when their tempera- 
tures were much higher than they are now, must 
have condensed to form oceans as the planets cooled. 



THE GIANT PLANETS 135 

At a later stage, with still further cooling, these 
oceans froze to form a coating of ice over the surface. 
It was suggested by Dr. Jeffreys that these planets 
may be regarded as consisting essentially of a core 
of rock, generally similar to the Earth in its con- 
stitution and of about the same mean density, 
surrounded by ice-coatings of great depth, above 
which are very extensive atmospheres. We are 
unable to penetrate the atmospheres nearly far 
enough to see these ice-coatings but we can be pretty 
certain that they exist. 

If, then, we picture these planets to be composed 
of three regions, each sharply differentiated in 
density the central rock core, the ice-coating of 
lower density and the atmosphere of still lower 
density it is possible to make approximate estimates 
of the extent of each region and of the mean 
densities of the atmospheres. These estimates ha.ve 
to be determined to give the correct mean density 
and the observed degree of flattening. According 
to the calculations made by Dr. Rupert Wildt, the 
rocky core of Jupiter has a radius of about 22,000 
miles, so that it occupies only about one-eighth of 
the whole volume corresponding to the visible disk. 
The ice-coating is about 16,000 miles in thickness 
and the depth of the atmosphere is about 6,000 
miles. The figures for Saturn are even more 
astonishing. The rocky core of Saturn is about 
14,000 miles in radius; it is covered with a layer of 
ice some 6,000 miles thick, over which is an atmo- 
sphere extending to a height of 16,000 miles. 
Saturn has the most extensive atmosphere of any of 
the planets, both absolutely and relative to the size 



136 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

of the planet; this explains why it has the lowest 
mean density and the most flattened disk of any 
planet. It is of interest to note that the total weight 
of the atmosphere of Saturn is about equal to that 
of its rocky core. The data for the more distant 
planets, Uranus and Neptune, are a little more 
uncertain; the glacier coating on both of these 
planets is some 6,000 miles in thickness, whilst the 
depths of the atmospheres are approximately 3,000 
miles for Uranus and 2,000 miles for Neptune. 
These figures must be regarded as liable to some 
uncertainty, but there seems to be little doubt that 
they provide a substantially correct picture of the 
constitution of the giant planets. 

Some interesting consequences follow from the 
great extent of these atmospheres. The pressures at 
the bottom of them are very great. At the bottom of 
the atmosphere of Jupiter, for instance, the pressure 
is fully a million times the pressure at the bottom of 
the Earth's atmosphere or, in other words, at the 
surface of the Earth. At a relatively small depth in 
the atmospheres, the pressure is great enough to 
compress each gaseous constituent of the atmosphere 
to a density nearly equal to that of the corresponding 
liquid or solid. It is stated by Wildt that at the 
bottom of the atmospheres the pressure is great 
enough to solidify even the permanent gases, includ- 
ing hydrogen and helium. Little or nothing is 
known about the properties of substances at these 
enormous pressures; if we knew more we should 
probably be in a better position to understand some 
of the many puzzling phenomena that are presented 
to us by the atmosphere of Jupiter, phenomena 



THE GIANT PLANETS 137 

that have been studied in some detail, as briefly 
described previously. 

We have spoken about extensive atmospheres to 
the giant planets but we have now reached the sur- 
prising conclusion that at a relatively small depth in 
the outer layer of tow density the pressure becomes 
sufficiently great to compress the constituents into 
the solid or liquid state. The use of the term 
atmosphere in connection with these planets is, 
therefore^ somewhat misleading, and it would be 
more correct to speak of the outer layer of low 
density; this outer layer probably ceases to be 
gaseous at a depth of not more than a few hundred 
miles. 

The mean densities of the outer layers are low; 
according to Wildt's calculations they are 0-78 for 
Jupiter and 0-41 for Saturn. This enables most of 
the possible constituents to be excluded, for all 
known gases in the solid or liquid state have densi- 
ties exceeding 0-3, with the exception of hydrogen 
and helium. Frozen oxygen, for instance, has a 
density of 1^45; nitrogen, 1-02; ammonia, 0-82. 
In addition to helium and hydrogen, the only gases 
whose densities in the liquid or solid state are lower 
than the density of the greater portion of the outer 
layer of Jupiter are the two hydrocarbons, methane 
or marsh-gas and ethane. There seems to be no 
escape from the conclusion that the outer layer of 
the major planets must contain large quantities of 
liquid or solid hydrogen and helium. 

This conclusion is in full accord with expectation. 
The planets are believed to have been formed in 
some way from the Sun, so that initially their com- 



138 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

position must have been generally similar to that of 
the outer layers of the Sun. Now we have learnt in 
recent years a good deal about the composition of the 
outer layers of the Sun. The principal constituent 
is hydrogen; the Sun seems, in fact, to consist of 
hydrogen to the extent of about one-third part by 
weight. Next in abundance to hydrogen come 
helium, oxygen and carbon, followed by nitrogen, 
silicon and the metallic elements. As massive 
planets, like the four major planets, are able to 
retain the light constituents of their original atmo- 
spheres, it is to be expected that large amounts of 
hydrogen and helium are contained in their atmo- 
spheres at the present time. There is no means, 
however, by which this conclusion can be tested by 
observation. 

The spectra of the major planets are of great 
interest and give some partial information about the 
composition of their outer atmospheres. In the 
early days of the application of the spectroscope to 
astronomy, Huggins discovered, by visual examina- 
tion of the spectrum of Jupiter, that there was a 
strong absorption band in the orange region of the 
spectrum and that there were several weaker bands 
in the green region. These bands appear more 
strongly in the spectrum of Saturn than in that of 
Jupiter, but they are not present in the spectrum of 
the rings of Saturn; this provides conclusive proof 
that they originate in the atmosphere of Saturn. 
Uranus and* Neptune show for the most part the 
same bands, but with still greater intensity, together 
with some additional ones. As we proceed from 
Jupiter outwards to Neptune we accordingly find 



THE GIANT PLANETS 139 

that there is a great increase in the selective absorp- 
tion of light in the yellow, red and infra-red regions 
of the spectrum. For Uranus and Neptune the 
absorptions are so strong that most of the yellow and 
red regions of their spectra are lost by the absorp- 
tion; it is because of this loss of the light of long 
wave-length that these two planets appear green 
when seen in the telescope. More recent investiga- 
tions by Dr. Slipher, at the Flagstaff Observatory, 
Arizona, have extended the spectra of the major 
planets to longer wave-lengths far into the infra-red 
region and have revealed several more strong 
absorptions in that region. 

When these absorptions in the spectra of the 
major planets were discovered, and for more than 
sixty years afterwards, it was not known what their 
origins were. They had never been observed in 
any spectra in the laboratory, and for many years 
they remained one of the unsolved problems of 
spectroscopy. The clue to their identification first 
came in the year 1932 from purely theoretical 
considerations. From the theoretical study of 
molecular spectra Dr. Wildt came to the conclusion 
that some of the absorptions agreed in wave-length 
with bands that should be present in the spectrum of 
ammonia and that others agreed in wave-length 
with bands that should be present in the spectrum of 
methane or marsh-gas, the gas that is given off by 
decaying vegetation, and is known to the coal- miner 
as the deadly fire-damp. These conclusions, based 
on theoretical reasoning, were subsequently con- 
firmed by laboratory observations; the reason why 
the bands had not been detected in the laboratory 



140 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

before theoretical reasoning had suggested their 
identification was that a considerable quantity of 
gas is required for their production with sufficient 
intensity to be easily observed. 

After the origin of the absorptions had been con- 
firmed in the laboratory and the absorptions 
produced by ammonia and marsh-gas had been 
fully investigated, the spectra of the major planets 
were photographed by Dr. Dunham, using the 100- 
inch telescope at the Mount Wilson Observatory, 
with optical power far superior to that which had 
been available to Dr. Slipher. The more detailed 
investigation that was possible with the aid of this 
giant telescope showed that there was a complete 
and detailed coincidence between the spectra of 
ammonia and marsh-gas obtained in the laboratory 
and the absorptions shown in the spectra of the 
major planets. 

A comparison between the strength of the absorp- 
tions in the spectrum of Jupiter and the strength of 
the absorptions produced by passing light through 
a tube of known length containing ammonia gas 
at atmospheric pressure, enabled Dr. Dunham to 
conclude that the quantity of ammonia gas pro- 
ducing the absorptions in the spectrum of Jupiter is 
equivalent to a layer 30 feet thick under standard 
conditions of temperature and pressure. The 
amount of ammonia in the atmosphere of Saturn is 
not so great, the ammonia absorptions being weaker 
in the spectrum of Saturn than in ; that of Jupiter. 
Ammonia has not been detected at all in the spectra 
of Uranus and Neptune. 

In the spectra of all the four major planets the 



THE GIANT PLANETS 14! 

absorptions produced by marsh-gas are much 
stronger than those produced by ammonia and, as 
we have already mentioned, Uranus and Neptune 
appear green because the yellow and red regions of 
their spectra are to a large extent cut out by the 
very great intensity of these absorptions. It was 
found by Drs. Adel and Slipher in 1935, that a 
column of marsh-gas, forty-five feet in length, and at 
a pressure of forty atmospheres, gave absorption 
bands that were intermediate in intensity between 
those of the bands present in the spectra of Jupiter 
and Saturn. The much greater strength of the 
absorptions due to marsh-gas in the spectra of the 
two more remote planets, Uranus and Neptune, is 
probably accounted for by the lower temperature 
of these planets. At the very low temperatures that 
prevail on Uranus and Neptune, all the ammonia 
is frozen out of their atmospheres ; this explains why 
no ammonia can be detected in the spectra of 
Uranus and Neptune. The absence from the atmo- 
spheres of these two planets of clouds consisting of 
droplets of liquid ammonia or small crystals of 
frozen ammonia, which must be present in the 
atmospheres of Jupiter and Saturn, makes it possible 
to see through the atmospheres of Uranus and 
Neptune to a much greater depth than in the case of 
Jupiter and Saturn. Adel arid Slipher have 
estimated that twenty-five miles of marsh-gas at 
atmospheric pressure would be required to ^ive 
absorptions as strong as those that are present in 
the spectrum of Neptune. When it is recalled that 
the equivalent thickness of the atmosphere of the 
Earth at atmospheric pressure is only 5^ miles, we 



142 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

have here very direct and conclusive evidence of an 
atmosphere far more extensive than that of our 
Earth. 

It might be expected that, marsh-gas being such 
an important constituent of the atmospheres of the 
major planets, other gaseous hydrocarbons would 
also be present in their atmospheres. Such sub- 
stances as ethane, ethylene and acetylene have 
been looked for in vain. Ammonia and marsh-gas 
between them account, in fact, for all the absorp- 
tions detected in the spectra of the major planets 
and there are no absorptions remaining to be 
accounted for by other gaseous constituents. It is 
a grand slam. 

The gaseous atmospheres of the major planets, 
which form the upper regions of their outer low- 
density layers, are, therefore, entirely different from 
the atmosphere of the Earth. Hydrogen and 
helium must be present in these atmospheres in large 
quantity and the other inert gases, argon, krypton, 
etc., must also be present. There is a considerable 
amount of the poisonous marsh-gas and, in the case 
of Jupiter and Saturn, some of the pungent am- 
monia gas also; the temperatures are too low for 
ammonia to be present in large amounts. There 
cannot be any carbon dioxide, because of the low 
temperature; there is unlikely to be any free 
nitrogen and there will certainly be no free oxygen. 

How does it came about that we find on these 
planets atmospheres that contrast so strangely with 
the atmosphere with which we are familiar on the 
Earth ? Can we explain how such atmospheres 
have come into existence ? In a general way we 



THE GIANT PLANETS 143 

are able to provide a satisfactory explanation and to 
show that the surprising difference between the 
atmospheres of the great planets and the atmosphere 
of the Earth is the result of the great planets having 
been able to retain all their hydrogen, whereas most 
of the hydrogen that was present in the initial 
atmosphere of the Earth was able to escape whilst 
the Earth was still hot. 

Let us consider what is likely to have been the 
course of events whilst one of these giant planets 
cooled. With the gradual fall in temperature from 
its initial high value, a stage would be reached when 
liquefaction would set in, giving rise to a liquid core 
surrounded by an extensive gaseous atmosphere. 
In the presence of hydrogen at a high temperature, 
the oxides of iron are reduced, metallic iron being 
produced. Most of the iron would, therefore, go 
into the liquid core in its metallic state, oxygen being 
set free and entering into the atmosphere. The 
oxides of the remaining principal constituents of the 
rocks, including potassium, sodium, magnesium, 
calcium and silicon, are not reduced in the presence 
of hydrogen at high temperature. They would, 
therefore, combine to form liquid rock masses, 
generally similar in composition to terrestrial rocks. 
With still further cooling, the rock crust would 
begin to solidify; there would still be a liquid core of 
molten iron and the atmosphere at this stage would 
consist of hydrogen, helium, oxygen, nitrogen, 
carbon and smaller quantities of the inert gases, 
as well as of sulphur, chlorine and other elements. 

As the planet cooled and the temperature fell still 
further, chemical action would take place. The 



PLATE 10 

SPECTRA OF THE PLANETS 

The plate shows portions of the spectra of Venus, 
Mars, Jupiter and Saturn, to illustrate the composition 
of their atmospheres. 

The first strip shows corresponding portions of the 
spectra of the Sun and Venus on the same scale. Many 
of the absorption lines are common to the two spectra ; 
these absorptions are produced in the outer layers of 
the Sun. A number of additional strong absorptions 
are to be seen in the spectrum of Venus, which are not 
present in the spectrum of the Sun. These are all pro- 
duced by carbon dioxide in the atmosphere of Venus. 

The second strip shows portions of the spectra of Mars 
(above) and the Moon (below) taken when at the same 
altitude under conditions of exceptional atmospheric 
dryness by Dr. Slipher at the Flagstaff Observatory 
(altitude 7,180 feet). The absorption due to water- 
vapour (marked a) is stronger in the spectrum of Mars 
than in that of the Moon, indicating the presence of 
water-vapour in the atmosphere of Mars. 

The third strip shows the spectrum of the ball of 
Saturn (centre) and of the rings (above and below). 
Between D and C, and to the right of B, absorptions are 
seen in the spectrum of Saturn which are absent from 
the spectrum of the rings. These are caused by marsh- 
gas in the atmosphere of Saturn. 

The bottom strip shows corresponding portions of 
the spectra of the Sun, Saturn and Jupiter. Absorp- 
tions produced by ammonia gas (snown under the 
spectrum of Jupiter) are present in the spectrum of Jupiter 
and, less strongly, in the spectrum of Saturn, but are 
absent from the Sun's spectrum. This proves that 
ammonia is present in the atmospheres of Jupiter and 
Saturn. 




' - &%%ftW$ ' f' 





e g ,,7W 




' . tid- 

* '*;,: 



PLATE 1 1 

CLOUDS ON THE PLANET VENUS 

A portion of a series of photographs of Venus in ultra- 
violet light, taken by Dr. F. E. Ross in June 1927 with 
the Go-inch reflector of the Mount Wilson Observatory, 
is reproduced. The contrast on the original negatives 
has been greatly increased by copying in order to make 
the markings more readily visible. Corresponding 
markings are not shown on photographs in red light. 

A comparison of photographs taken on the same day 
shows the reality of the recorded markings. These are 
of two types : bright clouds, which appear as bulges at 
the limb, and dark clouds, which appear as depressions 
at the limb. The dark clouds are most frequently seen 
near the " terminator," the dividing line between the 
sunlit and dark parts of the planet. 

The bright clouds are probably thin cirrus clouds 
above the permanent cloud layer, overlying a yellowish 
atmosphere. Where this upper atmosphere is free from 
cloud, no ultra-violet light is reflected back and the 
appearance is that of a dark cloud. 



146 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

carbon would combine with some of the oxygen to 
form carbon dioxide. The remainder of the oxygen 
would combine with some of the hydrogen, which, 
it may be recalled, was by far the predominating 
constituent of the atmosphere, to form steam. The 
atmosphere would then consist largely of hydrogen, 
helium and the other inert gases, carbon dioxide 
and steam. By this time the temperature would 
have fallen to somewhere about 1,000 C. 

Now carbon dioxide can combine under suitable 
conditions with hydrogen to form marsh-gas and 
water-vapour. But the reaction is what chemists 
term a reversible one. Under other circumstances 
it can proceed in the reverse direction, so that the 
marsh-gas then reacts with water-vapour to give 
carbon dioxide and free hydrogen. The formation 
of marsh-gas is accompanied by a decrease in 
volume and is therefore favoured by high pressure, 
whereas high temperature tends to cause the reac- 
tion to proceed in the reverse direction. At the 
temperature of 1,000 C. and the relatively low 
pressure which then prevailed on the planet, the 
predominant tendency is for the mixture of carbon 
dioxide and hydrogen to be stable; but as the tem- 
perature fell there would be an increasing amount 
of marsh-gas formed. When the temperature had 
fallen below about 300 C. practically all the carbon 
dioxide would have been converted into marsh-gas. 
The presence of marsh-gas or methane in the 
atmosphere of a giant planet might, therefore, have 
been anticipated. 

We have mentioned that no traces can be de- 
tected in the atmospheres of the major planets of 



THE GIANT PLANETS 147 

other hydrocarbons such as acetylene, ethane, 
ethylene and so forth. But it is possible for these 
hydrocarbons also to be formed from carbon 
dioxide and hydrogen. How, then, are we to 
account for their absence ? The explanation lies in 
the facts that molecules of these substances are 
readily broken up by the action of ultra-violet light, 
and that they are also attacked by hydrogen atoms, 
the carbon chains being broken up. As a result of 
such processes the higher hydrocarbons would be 
completely destroyed in a time that is short com- 
pared with the age of the planets, methane being 
the end result of this process. The molecules of 
methane are themselves broken up by the action of 
ultra-violet light, but in an atmosphere containing 
free hydrogen the methane is again formed. When 
there is an ample supply of hydrogen, as there cer- 
tainly is in the atmospheres of the giant planets, a 
steady state results in which, though molecules of 
methane are being continually broken up and 
formed again, there is a constant amount of methane 
present in the atmosphere. 

It has been suggested that the formation of methane 
and steam from carbon dioxide and hydrogen at 
a temperature of about 300 C. would be greatly 
facilitated by suitable activation. The partially 
reduced oxides of iron, which should be present on 
the rocky surface of the planet exposed to hot 
hydrogen, would provide a suitable agent for such 
activation and would ensure that all the carbon 
dioxide would rapidly be transformed. 

As the temperature fell still further there would 
be combination between the nitrogen in the atmo- 



148 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

sphere and some of the hydrogen to produce 
ammonia. This, again, is a reversible reaction and 
the ammonia will in turn break down into nitrogen 
and hydrogen. The lower the temperature and the 
higher the pressure, the greater will be the concen- 
tration of ammonia. It has been shown that the 
presence of methane will tend to prevent the de- 
composition of ammonia. The net result is that as 
the temperature falls below about 200 C. the pro- 
portion of free nitrogen to ammonia will decrease 
rapidly. 

The planet continued to cool, and at length the 
water-vapour began to condense and ultimately an 
ocean of very great depth was formed. In con- 
densing, the water vapour would carry ammonia 
gas with it in solution, so that the ocean would be 
strongly alkaline with ammonia. Compounds of 
sulphur and chlorine with hydrogen, such as the 
evil-smelling sulphuretted hydrogen, which may 
have been present in the atmosphere in small 
amounts, would also be carried down in solution. 
With a still further fall in temperature a stage at 
length arrived when the oceans froze. It may be 
noted that a solution containing one part of 
ammonia in two of water freezes at 100 C.; the 
major planets are all colder than this. 

The final result, after the planet had cooled to 
about its present temperature, was an atmosphere in 
which hydrogen is the predominant constituent, with 
helium present in considerable amount, and argon, 
neon and the other rare gases present in lesser pro- 
portions. There would be no water-vapour, for it 
had all been frozen out, no carbon dioxide and no 



THE GIANT PLANETS 149 

nitrogen. Methane should be present in consider- 
able amount, but ammonia in moderate amount 
only, for it had mostly been carried down in solu- 
tion. In planets as cold as Uranus and Neptune 
the residual ammonia would be precipitated as a 
solid ; even in the atmosphere of Jupiter it is not far 
from the point of precipitation. 

This fact may be used to obtain an estimate of 
the minimum possible temperature of the visible 
surface of Jupiter. The amount of ammonia in 
the atmosphere of Jupiter is estimated to be equiva- 
lent to a layer thirty feet thick under standard con- 
ditions. Below a certain temperature it would not 
be possible for the quantity of ammonia, which is 
observed to be present in the atmosphere of Jupiter, 
to exist in the atmosphere; it would be partially pre- 
cipitated by its own weight. It can be shown from 
theoretical considerations that in an atmosphere 
consisting mainly of hydrogen, the lowest tempera- 
ture possible at which the observed quantity of 
ammonia could be present is 120 C. This is in 
close agreement with the temperature determined 
by direct observation. The amount of ammonia in 
the atmosphere of Saturn is less than in that of 
Jupiter and is consistent with a temperature some 
15 C. lower; this, again, is in close accordance 
with the observed temperature. 

From purely theoretical reasoning, therefore, we 
should expect to find atmospheres on the giant 
planets which are closely in accordance with what 
observation reveals. The crucial fact involved in 
their interpretation is the presence of a large excess 
of hydrogen; it is to this abundance of hydrogen 



150 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

that the marked contrast between the atmospheres 
of these planets and the atmosphere of the Earth is 
due. In their broad outlines the main facts about 
the constitution of these atmospheres are explained. 
The general line of reasoning will apply to all very 
massive planets. We may expect them to have 
very extensive atmospheres, containing hydrogen, 
helium and marsh-gas; but no oxygen. 

There still remain many points of detail to be 
explained, such as the nature of the belts on Jupiter 
and Saturn, the nature of the Red Spot and South 
Tropical Disturbance on Jupiter and the variety of 
colours, ranging from white through pink and 
brown, which are to be seen upon the surface of 
Jupiter. It has been suggested that these colours 
may be due to the formation of small quantities of 
iridescent compounds involving sodium. It is 
known that sodium is present in small quantity in 
the atmosphere of the Earth at very great heights 
and the suggestion has been made that the sodium 
has been swept up by the Earth as it moves with 
the Sun through space, for sodium is known to be 
present in very small amount in interstellar space. 
If this were so and it must not be regarded as 
having been definitely established the presence of 
sodium in the outer atmosphere of Jupiter could be 
accounted for in the same way. This attempt to 
account for the colours to be seen on Jupiter can 
scarcely be regarded at present as much more than 
mere speculation, but it is mentioned here as an 
indication of the lines along which attempts are 
being made to explain some of the phenomena 
that are still very puzzling. A possible explanation 



THE GIANT PLANETS 15! 

of the Red Spot has recently been suggested by 
Wildt. He considers that it may be a vast solid 
body floating in an ocean of permanent gases. 
The nature of the solid body is not known, but we 
may think of it as analogous to an iceberg floating 
in the ocean; it may consist of solid hydrogen. 
Peek has pointed out that if the level at which it 
floats is subject to slight variations, the changes in 
rotational velocity of the spot can be accounted 
for. In this connection he remarks that whenever 
the spot becomes conspicuously dark the rotational 
period lengthens. The changes of colour may be 
associated with changes of level. It seems that in 
this way it may be possible to explain the principal 
phenomena of the Red Spot. 

The giant planets are worlds in strange contrast 
to our own with their enormously deep coatings of 
ammoniated ice, covered to a depth of thousands 
of miles with solid or liquid gases, over which are 
atmospheres devoid of oxygen or water-vapour but 
containing large quantities of poisonous marsh-gas. 
These dreary, remote, frozen wastes of the solar 
system are not worlds where we can hope to find 
life of any sort. Great cold may not by itself make 
life impossible, even though it may make its de- 
velopment extremely improbable; nor by itself may 
great pressure. But when these conditions are com- 
bined with absence of oxygen and of moisture and 
with abundance of poisonous gases, we have such a 
combination of unfavourable circumstances that 
we are compelled to turn elsewhere in our quest for 
life in the universe. 



CHAPTER VII 



VENUS THE EARTH'S TWIN 
SISTER 

OF all the planets in the solar system, Venus most 
nearly resembles the Earth in size, in mass and in 
mean density : and so it is on Venus that we have the 
greatest expectation of finding conditions akin to 
those that exist on the Earth. 

The path of Venus lies inside the path of the 
Earth. When Venus is at its nearest to the Earth 
it is only 26 million miles away. No other body 
ever comes so near the Earth, with the exception of 
the Moon and an occasional comet or asteroid. 
When at its farthest from the Earth, Venus is 160 
million miles away. With such a wide range 
between its greatest and least distances, it is natural 
that at some times Venus appears much brighter 
than at others. When at its brightest it is easily 
seen with the naked eye in broad daylight. When 
I lived in South Africa, I was sitting by the sea one 
day when, by chance looking upwards, I saw, as I 
thought, an aeroplane flying at a great height, 
glittering brightly in the sunshine against the azure 
blue sky. But as I watched, I noticed that it 
remained in the same position, and only then 
realised that I was looking, not at an aeroplane, 
but at the planet Venus. 

When the orbit of a planet lies outside the orbit 
of the Earth the planet is, at times, visible through- 
out the night. When, however, the orbit is within 

152 



VENUS THE EARTH'S TWIN SISTER 153 

the orbit of the Earth, the planet can never be seen 
at midnight. It is visible either in the evening after 
sunset or in the morning before sunrise. Venus, 
because of its brightness, becomes a conspicuous 
object in the twilight sky and is often referred to as 
the evening star or the morning star according as it 
is seen after dusk or before dawn. The Greeks had 
two names for it; they called it Phosphorus when 
it appeared at dawn and Hesperus when it appeared 
at dusk. The identity of the evening and morning 
star was known, nevertheless, as early as the time 
of Pythagoras. 

Suppose we observe Venus night after night with 
a telescope. Commencing when it first appears 
low in the western sky just after sunset, we find 
that it shows a full sun-illumined disk; as it draws 
gradually away from the Sun night after night for 
nearly eight months it appears progressively brighter 
and larger, but the portion of the disk that is visible 
becomes gradually less. When at its greatest 
elongation from the Sun, it shows the half-moon 
phase. Then it will be seen to turn back, drawing 
gradually nearer to the Sun and developing a 
crescent phase that becomes narrower and narrower; 
the diameter of the image continues to increase; and 
for a time the planet continues to become brighter. 
The greatest brightness is reached about 32 days 
after the greatest eastern elongation, the phase then 
corresponding to that of the Moon when five days 
old. About ten weeks after eastern elongation, 
Venus vanishes in the Sun's rays; greatly diminished 
in . brightness, it then shows a large but narrow 
crescent. A little later it appears as the morning 



154 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

star and corresponding changes are passed through 
in the reverse order. 

It is of interest to recall that the phases of Venus 
were first discovered in 16.10 by Galileo, who was 
able to see the changing phases in his telescope. 
As was frequently done at that time, he announced 
his discovery in the form of an anagram : 

Haec immatura a me iamfrustra leguntur : o.y. 

The solution of the anagram, which concealed his 
discovery, was given some months later as: 

Cynthia figuras amulatur Mater Amorum, 

which means that " The Mother of the Loves (i.e. 
Venus) imitates the phases of Cynthia (i.e. the 
Moon)." 

Venus has been called the twin sister of the Earth 
because it closely resembles the Earth in size and 
weight. It is a little smaller than the Earth, its 
diameter being 7,700 miles as compared with the 
Earth's 7,927 miles. The area of its surface is 
therefore five per cent, smaller than the area of the 
surface of the Earth. Its weight is about four-fifths 
of the weight of the Earth. The velocity of escape 
from Venus is only slightly less than the velocity of 
escape from the Earth and it is therefore to be 
anticipated that Venus will be found to possess a 
fairly extensive atmosphere, comparable in extent 
with the atmosphere of the Earth. 

The presence of an atmosphere on Venus is 
readily proved by observation. When Venus is 
between us and the Sun, showing the narrow 
crescent phase, the tips of the horns of the crescent 



VENUS THE EARTH'S TWIN SISTER 155 

are not at the two ends of a diameter as they are 
in the case of the crescent Moon, but the horns 
extend well round the circumference of the dark 
limb. This means that there is a region of twilight 
on Venus; the Sun is not shining directly on this 
portion of the planet but it becomes faintly visible 
by the light scattered in the atmosphere. If the 
Earth had no atmosphere, darkness would come 
suddenly as soon as the Sun had set; the scattering 
of the sunlight by the Earth's atmosphere for some 
time after the Sun has disappeared below the 
horizon causes the gradual transition from day to 
night, which we term twilight. 

Direct evidence of an atmosphere on Venus is 
also obtained at times of the transits of Venus. I 
have mentioned that the path of Venus lies inside 
the path of the Earth and it must sometimes happen 
that Venus will pass directly between us and the 
Sun. We then see Venus as a dark spot moving 
across the face of the Sun. If the orbits of Venus 
and the Earth were in the same plane, Venus 
would pass in front of the Sun every time that it 
changed from an evening to a morning star. The 
orbit of Venus is, however, inclined to the orbit of 
the Earth as an angle of about 3^; Venus can 
therefore only be seen projected on the disk of the 
Sun at a time when it is close to one of the two 
points where its orbit crosses the plane of the orbit 
of the Earth. Transits of Venus across the Sun 
are somewhat rare phenomena. The last two 
transits occurred on December 8th, 1874, and 
December 6th, 1882; the next two transits will 
occur on June yth, 2004 and June 5th, 2012. When 



156 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

a transit of Venus takes place and Venus is just 
entering upon the disk of the Sun or just leaving it 
the edge of the portion of Venus that is outside the 
Sun is surrounded by a bright line of light. This 
appearance can only be caused by the scattering of 
sunlight by an atmosphere around Venus. It will 
be remembered that this appearance is not seen 
when Mercury transits on to the Sun's disk, because 
Mercury has no atmosphere. 

When we look at Venus in the telescope, we are 
apt to be disappointed. As we have already 
mentioned, she shows phases like the Moon, 
depending upon the proportion of her sunlit face that 
is turned towards us. We might hope to find some 
evidence of continents and oceans on a world that 
is in some respects so similar to our own. But we 
are doomed to disappointment. There are no 
well-defined markings to be seen on her surface. 
Nothing more than faint ill-defined shadings may 
be seen, and these can only be seen occasionally. 
They are very elusive, for there is so little contrast 
between the markings and the rest of the disk that 
they are barely visible. They have been described 
as " large dusky spots " and are certainly not 
permanent. Such markings as are from time to 
time visible are therefore certainly not surface 
markings; they must be produced in the planet's 
atmosphere. 

Venus must either be covered with a permanent 
layer of cloud or her atmosphere must be so hazy 
that light from the Sun cannot penetrate to the 
surface and out again. The light that reaches us 
from Venus must either have been reflected from 



VENUS THE EARTH'S TWIN SISTER 157 

a layer of cloud or have been scattered within the 
atmosphere without penetrating to the surface. 

It might be hoped that some further information 
could be obtained by photographing Venus on 
plates sensitive to the long wave-length infra-red 
light. Within recent years there has been a great 
development in photography in the use of infra-red 
or haze-cutting plates. Everybody is familiar with 
the way in which, on a fine day, with a slight haze, 
the detail in a distant landscape is lost. But if, 
under such conditions., we take a photograph using 
a plate that has been specially sensitised for the 
infra-red light, much detail that is invisible to the 
eye will be clearly shown. This is illustrated in 
Plate 1 2 where two photographs are reproduced, 
showing the view from the top of Mount Hamilton 
in California, where the Lick Observatory is located, 
looking across the valley to the distant mountains. 
One photograph was taken with a plate sensitive 
to the short-wave ultra-violet light, the other with 
a plate sensitive to the long-wave infra-red light, 
the two photographs being taken at the same time 
and therefore under the same conditions. The 
ultra-violet photograph dirnly shows the skyline of 
the distant mountains but none of the intervening 
detail, which is clearly revealed by the infra-red 
photograph. 

We therefore photograph Venus using these infra- 
red plates, in the hope that in this way something 
will be revealed that the eye cannot detect. Venus, 
however, will not be circumvented in this way. 
She refuses to reveal her secrets; the plate shows 
us no more than our eyes can see. The infra-red 



158 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

light is no more successful in penetrating to the 
surface and out again than the ultra-violet light 
had been. 

There is one difference that may be noted between 
the photographs in ultra-violet light and those in 
infra-red light. The former record bright mark- 
ings, which rapidly change their form &nd are of 
short duration. Photographs of Venus in ultra- 
violet light, showing some of these bright markings 
and illustrating the rapidity with which they 
change, are reproduced in Plate 1 1 . These markings 
are not seen on the photographs in the infra-red 
light. They indicate the existence of some sort of 
atmospheric haze or possibly of very thin clouds 
at a high altitude, through which the light of 
long wave-length can pass without difficulty, 
but which scatters or reflects the light of short 
wave-length. - , 

Venus reflects about 60 per cent, of the sunlight 
that falls upon it. This high reflecting power, 
which contrasts with the low reflecting powers 
about seven per cent. of both Mercury and the 
Moon, is very much what we should expect from a 
planet covered with a thick layer of clouds. The 
visible surface is practically white almost devoid 
of colour; this again is consistent with the appear- 
ance of a cloud layer. An estimation of the height 
to which the atmosphere of Venus extends can be 
made from the amount of the prolongation of the 
horns, when the planet is seen as a narrow crescent. 
It can be shown that the portion of the atmosphere 
where the twilight is sufficiently bright to be seen 
through the glare of our own atmosphere extends 



VENUS THE EARTH'S TWIN SISTER 159 

to a height of about 4,000 feet above the visible 
surface of Venus. The total height of the atmo- 
sphere of Venus must, of course, be many times 
greater than this, for the faint twilight effect pro- 
duced by the more tenuous upper reaches of the 
planet's atmosphere would be lost in the glare of 
our own atmosphere. It seems probable, never- 
theless, that the atmosphere of Venus above the 
visible surface is both less extensive and less dense 
than the atmosphere of the Earth. We can more 
fairly compare it with the portion of the Earth's 
atmosphere above the high clouds. This seems to 
suggest that these observations by no means reveal 
the full extent of the atmosphere of Venus, which 
we should expect to be fairly comparable with that 
of the Earth. It therefore seems reasonable to 
conclude that the visible surface is a permanent 
layer of cloud, which we have no means of pene- 
trating, situated at a fairly high level above the 
surface of the planet. 

The ill-defined nature of the markings seen on 
Venus and their impermanence make it difficult 
to determine the length of the day on Venus with 
any accuracy. The conclusions reached by dif- 
ferent observers have been very varied and some- 
what contradictory. Some have asserted that the 
length of the day on Venus is about the same as the 
length of the day on the Earth; others have con- 
cluded that Venus always turns the same face to 
the Sun, just as Mercury does, so that her day is 
equal to her year, which is 225 of our days. Most 
probably the truth lies between these two extremes. 
It was through the agency of the tides raised by the 



PLATE 12 

PHOTOGRAPHS OF MARS AND OF TERRESTRIAL 

LANDSCAPE 

The plate shows photographs of Mars (a and b} and 
of San Jos6, taken from the top of Mount Hamilton, 
California (c and d). The photographs a and c were 
taken with ultra-violet light (short wave-length) , b and d 
were taken with infra-red light (long wave-length) . The 
distant mountains and the town of San Jose in the valley 
are closely seen in d but are obliterated in c. The dis- 
tance of San Jose from the point where the photograph 
was taken is 13 J miles; the short wave-length ultra-violet 
"light was unable to penetrate through this extent of the 
Earth's atmosphere. The surface markings of Mars are 
clearly showrji in b, but not in a, indicating the presence 
on Mars of an atmosphere of sufficient extent to prevent 
the ultra-violet light from penetrating to the surface of 
Mars and out again. 

Photographs by Dr. W. H. Wright, Lick Observatory, 
with Grossley Reflector. 



PLATE 13 

CLOUDS ON THE PLANET MARS 

The series of six photographs, taken in ultra-violet 
light, show the formation and growth of a white cloud 
during the course of a Martian afternoon. The photo- 
graphs, in order from left to right, were secured at 
intervals through a period of about four hours, during 
which the planet rotated 55. The place of the brightest 
part of the cloud, in the successive positions of the planet, 
is shown by the arrows in the lower row, the rotational 
movement being upwards and to the left. The cloud is 
not visible in the first picture, but becomes so in the 
second and increases in strength as it is carried through 
the Martian afternoon to sunset. Photographs taken on 
1926, October 16, at the Lick and Mount Wilson 
Observatories . 

The lower series of photographs shows the formation 
of a yellow cloud, visible in infra-red but not in ultra- 
violet light. The centre photograph is taken in ultra- 
violet light, the others in infra-red light, the markings 
being displaced between these two photographs by the 
rotation of Mars. If the photographs are turned 90, 
the markings will be seen to have the appearance of a 
stag's head. In the left-hand photograph will be seen, 
just under the stag's neck, a bright patch, which is not 
visible on the right-hand photograph, nor in the photo- 
graph in ultra-violet light. This bright patch is a 
yellow cloud. Photographs by Dr. Wright, 1926, 
November 23, at the Lick Observatory. 



l62 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

action of the Sun on Mercury before it solidified 
that the rotation of Mercury was slowed down until 
it eventually turned the same face always to the 
Sun; similarly, the tides raised on the Moon by the 
attraction of the Earth slowed down the rotation 
of the Moon until it always turns the same face to 
the Earth. The tides raised on Venus by the 
gravitational attraction of the Sun would have been 
much smaller than those raised on Mercury, because 
Venus is at a considerably greater distance. The 
tide-raising force falls off inversely as the cube of 
the distance, and at the distance of Venus it is only 
about one-sixth as great as at the distance of 
Mercury. It is consequently to be anticipated 
that, though the rotation of Venus would be slowed 
down to a moderate extent by the friction of the 
tides raised on her by the Sun, the effect would not 
be nearly large enough to cause her always to turn 
the same face to the sun. 

That the rotation period of Venus is not as short 
as a day is quite certain. If her rotation were as 
rapid as this, there would be no difficulty in detect- 
ing it by comparing the spectra of the light from 
the east and west limbs. The relative motion of 
the two limbs, one moving towards the Earth and 
the other away, would produce small relative shifts 
between the wave-lengths of the corresponding lines 
in the two spectra, which would be readily observed. 
No such shift has been detected. The inference 
from this failure to detect a relative shift is that the 
period of rotation rhust be at least several weeks in 
length. The same conclusion has been reached 
recently by M. Antoniadi from observations of the 



VENUS THE EARTH'S TWIN SISTER 163 

faint markings seen on Venus with the aid of the 
great telescope at Meudon, near Paris. 

It seems reasonably certain, on the other hand, 
that Venus does not turn the same face always to 
the Sun. The temperature of the sunlit side of 
Venus has been found by observation to be about 
50 to 60 C., whilst that of the dark side is about 
20 C. A much lower temperature of the dark 
side would be expected if it never received any heat 
from the Sun, but received heat only through con- 
vective motions of the atmosphere. The sunlit face, 
on the other hand, would be very much hotter than 
it is observed to be if it were continuously receiving 
heat from the Sun. The difference between the day 
and night temperatures on Venus is, therefore, 
considerably smaller than it would be if Venus 
always turned the same face to the Sun. We shall 
probably not be far wrong if we assume that the 
length of the day on Venus is equal to about four or 
five of our weeks. The year on Venus being equal 
to 225 of our days, it follows that on Venus there are 
only some six or seven days in the year. 

The measurements of the temperature on Venus 
do not refer to the true surface of the planet nor to 
what we may term the visible surface. The tem- 
perature of the true surface of the planet, beneath 
the permanent layer of cloud, is almost certainly 
appreciably higher than the temperature found 
by observation. There must be a considerable 
green-house effect beneath the^ cloud layer, the 
short-wave radiation from the Sun being absorbed 
and given out again as long wave-length heat 
radiation. It is quite possible that at the surface of 



164 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

Venus, in the equatorial regions, the temperature 
may be as high as, or even higher than, that of 
boiling water. 

The light reflected from Venus to the Earth has 
been analysed to find out whether it shows the 
absorptions that are characteristic of oxygen or 
water-vapour. Neither oxygen nor water-vapour 
has been detected. This negative result does not 
necessarily imply that there is neither oxygen nor 
water-vapour in the atmosphere of Venus, but 
merely that the amount is not sufficient to be 
revealed by the tests that can be used. The tests 
for one substance may be extremely sensitive and 
the presence of a very small quantity can then be 
detected, whilst the tests for another substance may 
be so insensitive that it must be present in very great 
abundance before there can be any hope of detect- 
ing it. The most striking illustration of differ- 
ences in the sensitivity of the tests for the presence of 
different substances is provided by the comparison 
between calcium-vapour and hydrogen in the outer 
layers of the Sun. The calcium-vapour gives rise to 
two extremely strong absorptions in the spectrum of 
sunlight, absorptions which are by far the strongest 
in the whole range of the Sun's spectrum that we 
are able to study. These intensely strong absorp- 
tions are produced by an amount of calcium-vapour 
which, under standard conditions in the laboratory, 
would be less than half an inch in thickness. The 
absorptions produced by hydrogen are weak rela- 
tively to those produced by calcium, yet the 
hydrogen is so abundant that it is estimated that, 
atom for atom, hydrogen is at least 300 times as 



VENUS THE EARTH'S TWIN SISTER 165 

abundant as the whole of the metallic vapours 
together. 

The tests for the presence of water-vapour in the 
atmosphere of Venus are less sensitive than those for 
the presence of oxygen. An amount of oxygen on 
Venus equal to a thousandth part of that above an 
equal area of the earth could certainly have been 
detected. It must be remembered, however, that 
we are unable to see down to the surface of Venus 
and any tests that we can apply give information 
only about the portion of the atmosphere that is 
above the permanent layer of cloud. Nevertheless, 
if the oxygen above the cloud layer were as much 
as the one-hundredth part of the oxygen in the 
atmosphere of the Earth above the highest clouds, it 
would have been detected. There is no escape 
from the conclusion that there can be very little, if 
any, oxygen in the atmosphere of Venus. 

The failure to detect water-vapour, even though 
the tests are less delicate than those for oxygen, may 
appear at first sight to be rather surprising. For if 
Venus is covered with a permanent layer of clouds 
there must be water-vapour, unless the clouds are 
of a different nature from those that occur in our 
own atmosphere. No alternative suggestion, which 
is at all feasible, of the nature of the clouds on Venus 
has been made and it seems certain that they must 
consist of water droplets, similar to the clouds in the 
Earth's atmosphere. The explanation of the appar- 
ent absence of water- vapour must be that the atmo- 
sphere above the clouds is extremely dry. Most of 
the water-vapour has been condensed out of the 
upper atmosphere and what is left is not sufficient 



l66 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

for us to be able to detect. In this respect the 
atmosphere of Venus seems to be similar to that of 
the Earth. In the atmosphere of the Earth the 
water- vapour is confined almost wholly to the lower 
layers and the amount above a height of five miles is 
always small. If the cloud layer on Venus reaches 
to a height of four or five miles above the surface, 
the failure to detect water-vapour in its atmosphere 
presents no difficulties. 

The most interesting and significant fact about 
the atmosphere of Venus is the great abundance of 
carbon dioxide. In 1932, Adams and Dunham, 
using the great loo-inch telescope at the Mount 
Wilson Observatory, discovered three strong absorp- 
tions in the spectrum of Venus in the long wave- 
length infra-red region. These absorptions are not 
found in the spectrum of the Sun, even when setting. 
They are not produced, therefore, in the atmosphere 
of the Earth but must originate in the atmosphere of 
Venus. At the time that they were discovered they 
had not been observed in any terrestrial spectrum 
and it was not known, therefore, what substance 
produced them. Theoretical investigations sug- 
gested that they might be due to carbon dioxide. 
This was confirmed when Dunham succeeded in 
obtaining a faint absorption, corresponding in 
position with the strongest of the three absorptions, 
by passing light through forty metres of carbon 
dioxide at a pressure of ten atmospheres. Later, 
Adel and Slipher were able to obtain all three 
absorptions by passing light through forty-five 
metres of carbon dioxide at a pressure of forty-seven 
atmospheres. The three absorptions coincided 



VENUS THE EARTH'S TWIN SISTER 167 

exactly in position with those observed in the spec- 
trum of Venus but, even with so great a thickness 
of carbon dioxide, they were less intense than the 
corresponding absorptions in the spectrum of 
Venus. 

Their laboratory investigations enabled Adel and 
Slipher to conclude that the amount of carbon 
dioxide above the visible surface of Venus is equi- 
valent to a layer two miles in thickness at standard 
atmospheric pressure and temperature. This 
affords direct experimental confirmation of the 
conclusion, which we have already reached, that 
Venus has an extensive atmosphere. The interest 
of the result lies, however, in the comparison be- 
tween the amount of carbon dioxide on Venus and 
the amount in the Earth's atmosphere. The 
amount of carbon dioxide present in the path of 
sunlight, when the Sun is setting, is equivalent to a 
thickness of about thirty feet only. Carbon dioxide 
is accordingly vastly more abundant in the atmo- 
sphere of Venus than in that of the Earth. 

The amount of carbon dioxide observed to be 
present in the atmosphere of Venus, equivalent to a 
layer two miles in thickness at standard atmospheric 
pressure and temperature, represents only the 
portion of the carbon dioxide that is above the 
permanent cloud layer the visible surface. The 
total amount above the solid surface of the planet 
may well be appreciably greater. When we recall 
that the whole atmosphere of the Earth at standard 
pressure and temperature would form a layer only 
about 5! miles in thickness and that we should 
expect the atmosphere of Venus to be rather less 



l68 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

extensive than that of the Earth, we are forced to 
the conclusion that carbon dioxide is an important 
constituent in the atmosphere of Venus, and that it 
may well be the predominant constituent. 

In Chapter IV we considered the evolution of the 
Earth's atmosphere in some detail. We came to 
the conclusion that most of the atmosphere that the 
Earth originally possessed was lost very early, whilst 
the Earth was still molten. As the Earth cooled and 
solidification set in, large quantities of gases, 
principally water-vapour and carbon dioxide, must 
have been evolved from the semi-molten mass. 
These gases with the residual gases from the initial 
atmosphere, consisting mainly of nitrogen, argon, 
neon and probably some carbon dioxide, formed the 
new atmosphere. 

The same general course of evolution is likely to 
have occurred in the case of Venus, which is so 
nearly equal to the Earth in size and weight. The 
atmosphere of Venus, in the early stages after 
solidification set in, consisted of carbon dioxide and 
water-vapour, along with nitrogen, argon, neon and 
probably small but relatively unimportant quanti- 
ties of other gases. Nitrogen, being a left-over 
from the initial atmosphere, is probably present in 
the atmosphere of Venus in smaller amount than in 
the atmosphere of the Earth, because it would be 
somewhat easier to escape from Venus than from 
the Earth. 

When Venus cooled to a temperature below the 
boiling-point of water, most of the water-vapour 
would condense out of the atmosphere and form 
oceans and lakes, leaving an atmosphere consisting 



VENUS THE EARTH'S TWIN SISTER 169 

primarily of carbon dioxide and nitrogen the 
quantity of nitrogen being less, however, than that 
in the Earth's atmosphere with some argon and 
small quantities of neon and other gases. 

The Earth a,t one stage in its history had an 
atmosphere of a similar nature, but we have seen 
that the atmosphere of the Earth then passed 
through a further stage, which consisted essentially 
in the removal of the carbon dioxide and its replace- 
ment by oxygen. It is clear that the atmosphere of 
Venus has not passed through this stage, at any rate 
to any great extent. The abundance of carbon 
dioxide in its atmosphere and the scarcity, or 
possibly even the absence, of oxygen are both 
confirmatory. 

This is a very important and significant con- 
clusion. What does it tell us ? When considering 
the atmosphere of the Earth, we remarked that the 
presence of free oxygen demanded explanation 
because oxygen is chemically a very active sub- 
stance and there are agencies in continual action 
tending to deplete the supply. The only way in 
which it was possible to account for the presence of 
free oxygen in the atmosphere of the Earth was 
through the action of vegetation, and it appeared 
that the store of oxygen in our atmosphere has been 
brought about through vegetation being buried and 
thereby preserved from decay vegetation that is 
now represented by the coal and oil beneath the 
surface of the Earth. If there were vegetation on 
Venus to any great extent, the atmosphere of Venus 
would also have passed through the corresponding 
stage of evolution. It clearly has not done so. 



I7O LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

Venus is, in fact, very much like what the Earth was 
before life had commenced to develop. 

We can draw a picture of Venus that is probably 
pretty near the truth, despite the fact that we have 
never seen her surface. An atmosphere rich in 
carbon dioxide will have a very powerful blanketing 
effect. This effect, together with solar radiation 
stronger than the Earth receives, will combine to 
make the temperature at the surface of Venus con- 
siderably higher than the temperature of the Earth. 
It is likely that the temperature is not much below 
1 00 C., the temperature at which water boils. 
Under such circumstances it is most improbable 
that life would begin to develop. The lack of 
vegetation and the absence of oxygen from the 
atmosphere of Venus are thereby explained. There 
are doubtless extensive oceans and swamps and a 
very hot humid atmosphere; the abundance of 
moisture is responsible for the permanent layer of 
thick clouds. 

Venus 5 then, appears to be a world where life has 
not yet developed, or, if it has commenced, where 
it is merely in such a primitive stage that we cannot 
obtain any direct evidence of it. It is a world 
where conditions are not greatly different from 
those that existed on the Earth many hundreds of 
millions of years ago. There may be expectations 
of life in the remote future when, as the Sun's 
supply of radiation becomes gradually depleted and 
the Sun slowly cools down, conditions will approxi- 
mate more and more to those that the Earth passed 
through and which led eventually to the appear- 
ance of life. As conditions become more suitable 



VENUS THE EARTH'S TWIN SISTER 171 

for life to appear on Venus they will become less 
favourable for its continued existence on the Earth. 
After life on the Earth has become extinct, a new 
chapter may commence on Venus leading gradually 
and progressively to more and more highly devel- 
oped forms of life and ultimately who can tell ? 
to intelligent life. 



CHAPTER VIII 



MARS THE PLANET OF 
SPENT LIFE 

To many persons Mars is the most interesting object 
in the heavens because it is the one and only world 
where we appear to have direct evidence of life an5 
because some astronomers have held the opinion 
that it provides evidence for the existence on it of 
intelligent beings. 

Mars revolves in an orbit that is outside the orbit 
of the Earth, its mean distance from the Sun being 
a little more than one and a half times that of the 
Earth. The orbit is rather elliptical and, in conse- 
quence, the distance of Mars from the Sun varies by 
more than 26 million miles. It requires a period 
of a little short of two years for Mars to complete 
one revolution in its orbit, and we overtake it on 
an average once in every two years and fifty days. 
Mars is then said to be in opposition, because the Sun 3 
the Earth and Mars are nearly in a straight line 
(they would be exactly in a straight line if it were 
not for the fact that the orbits of Mars and of the 
Earth are not quite in the same plane), the Sun and 
Mars being on opposite sides of the Earth, so that 
Mars rises at sunset and crosses the meridian at 
midnight. Because the orbits of Mars and the 
Earth are both somewhat elliptical the distance of 
Mars from the Earth at opposition can range from 
about 35 million miles to about 63 million miles. 
The nearer Mars is to the Earth at opposition, the 

172 



MARS THE PLANET OF SPENT LIFE 173 

more favourable the opportunity for studying its 
surface. The most favourable oppositions occur in 
August and the least favourable in February. The 
planet is at its brightest at opposition. At the least 
favourable oppositions Mars is not quite as bright 
as Sirius, the brightest star in the sky, whilst at the 
most favourable it becomes much brighter than any 
star and brighter than any other planet at its 
brightest except Venus. When at its greatest 
distance from the Earth, Mars is about half as 
bright again as the pole star. 

The diameter of Mars is about 4,215 miles, only 
a little more than half that of the Earth. Its weight 
is rather more than one-tenth of the weight of the 
Earth. The force of gravity on its surface is only 
two-fifths as great as that on the surface of the Earth 
and the velocity of escape from Mars is about three 
miles a second. This is less than one-half of the 
velocity of escape from the Earth, and we should 
therefore expect to find that Mars has some atmo- 
sphere, but that this atmosphere will prove to be 
considerably more tenuous and less extensive than 
the atmosphere of the Earth. 

The opportunities for the satisfactory observation 
of Mars are somewhat limited. Its apparent 
diameter ranges from 3! seconds of arc, when at 
its greatest distance, to twenty-five seconds at the 
most favourable opposition. At the favourable 
oppositions the size of the image seen in a telescope 
is therefore about seven times greater, and the area 
of the image about fifty times greater than when the 
planet is at its greatest distance. For the study of 
fine detail on the surface of the planet, the condi- 



174 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

tions are really only satisfactory for a few months 
around opposition 01% in other v,ords, for a few 
months every two years or so. 

Suppose we have at our command a large tele- 
scope of twenty-five feet focal length. At the most 
favourable oppositions, the diameter of the image of 
Mars in the focal plane of the telescope is only ^ 
inch; at the least favourable oppositions, it is about 
half as large whilst, when at its greatest distance, 
the diameter of the image is only ^fa- G inch. The 
smallness of the image in even a large telescope makes 
it impossible to study in minute detail the surface 
markings on Mars by photography. The detail is 
so intricate that much of it is finer than the grain of 
the photographic plate; moreover, the planet is 
never bright enough to be photographed by an 
instantaneous exposure. A time exposure is needed 
and then the slight tremors in the atmosphere, 
which almost invariably are present in greater or 
less degree, blur out the finer details in the image. 
If we endeavour to reduce the trouble arising from 
the coarseness of the grain of a fast plate by using 
slow fine-grained plates, it becomes necessary to 
increase the time of exposure considerably and the 
troubles from atmospheric unsteadiness then become 
greater. So in either case there is a limit to what 
the photograph can reveal. That is the reason 
why photographs of Mars show less detail than is 
recorded in drawings by competent observers. In 
visual observations, it is possible to wait for the 
occasional instants when the atmosphere becomes 
momentarily steady and the detail sharply defined, 
for on most nights there occur brief moments when 



MARS THE PLANET OF SPENT LIFE 175 

the seeing conditions become much better than 
the average. 

When Mars is at its nearest to the Earth, it is 
more favourably placed for observation than any 
other heavenly body, with the exception of the 
Moon. It is true that Venus at times comes closer 
to the Earth than Mars ever does but, at such times, 
Venus appears as a very narrow crescent and is 
visible only by daylight. If, when Mars is most 
favourably placed, we observe it in the telescope 
with a power of seventy-five, it appears as large as 
the Moon does to the naked eye. It might seem at 
first sight that the detailed study of the surface 
under such conditions would be easy. But if we 
compare the coarse detail that we can see on the 
Moon with the naked eye with the intricate fine 
detail shown on a photograph obtained with a large 
telescope, it will be realised how much is lost. 

Mars exhibits slight phases in the telescope, which 
were discovered by Galileo in 1610. But, since its 
orbit lies outside the orbit of the earth, it can never 
appear as a crescent, like Mercury and Venus. 
The greatest phase shown by Mars is comparable 
with the phase of the Moon when it is three days 
from full. 

Under favourable conditions Mars appears in the 
telescope as a beautiful object, with a strong orange 
colour, on which misty markings can be seen. The 
first sketch showing surface markings on Mars was 
made in 1659 by Huyghens, who, by studying the 
apparent movements of these markings, suggested 
that Mars rotated in twenty- four hours. In 1666 
Cassini found the period of rotation to be twenty- 



176 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

four hours forty minutes; this is close to the period 
given by modern observations, which is about 
twenty-four hours thirty-seven and a half minutes. 
Cassini also observed the characteristic feature of 
the polar caps, but it was not until near the end of 
the eighteenth century that Sir William Herschel 
detected the variation of the size of the polar caps 
with the seasons. 

Around whichever of the poles of Mars happens 
to be visible there is seen a bright white cap. The 
two polar caps show regular seasonal changes in 
size. During the northern summer, for instance, 
the northern cap shrinks whilst the southern cap 
grows. With the changing of the seasons the 
northern cap grows again whilst the southern cap 
shrinks. Analogy strongly suggests something simi- 
lar to the regions of ice and snow around the north 
and south poles of the Earth. 

In contrast to the changes in the polar caps, 
which are easily seen in moderate-sized telescopes, 
the dark markings are more 0? less permanent. 
We see these markings carried round by the rotation 
of Mars, and this enables the period of rotation to 
be fixed with high accuracy. 

The first really detailed and careful survey of the 
surface of Mars was made by the Italian astronomer, 
Schiaparelli, at the favourable opposition of 1877. 
Schiaparelli was a highly competent observer, he 
had an excellent telescope, good conditions for 
observing, and Mars was unusually close to the 
Earth. The existence of dusky markings on the 
planet, which stood out against the ruddy back- 
ground, was already known. It was believed that 



MARS THE PLANET OF SPENT LIFE 177 

these dusky markings were seas and that the ruddy 
background was dry land. But in 1877 Schiaparelli 
discovered, what had not previously been known, 
that there were dusky streaks crossing the land 
areas or " continents/' connecting up the " seas " 
with one another. He termed these streaks canali 
which, interpreted literally, means channels. But 
the similarity of the Italian word to the English 
word canal has caused a narrower interpretation to 
be placed upon the term given by Schiaparelli than 
he intended, with the result that there has been a 
good deal of misrepresentation. 

Schiaparelli continued to observe Mars for a 
number of years and discovered that the seas were 
not uniformly dusky. He remarked that the colour 
of the seas was generally brown, mixed with grey, 
but not always of equal intensity in all places, nor 
always the same in the same place at all times. 
From an absolute black it might descend to a light 
grey or to an ash colour. He compared these differ- 
ences in colouration on Mars with differences in 
colour of the seas on the Earth, adding that the 
seas of the warm zone are usually much darker than 
those near the pole; the Baltic, for instance, has a 
light muddy colour that is not observed in the 
Mediterranean. Schiaparelli noticed that some at 
least of the changes in colouration were seasonal in 
nature; he interpreted these changes as being 
changes in colour of the seas, which became darker 
as the Sun approached their zenith and summer 
began to rule. 

It was noticed also by Schiaparelli that the so- 
called continents were not uniform in colour. Over 

12 



178 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

the bulk of the continents an orange colour pre- 
dominated which in some areas, of relatively small 
extent, reached a dark red tint, whilst other small 
regions were yellow or white. But besides the dark 
and light regions, which were considered to be seas 
and continents respectively, there were some areas 
of small extent that were of an amphibious nature, 
appearing sometimes yellowish like the continents, 
sometimes brown or even black like the seas, 
whilst in other cases the colour was intermediate in 
tint, leaving a doubt whether they were sea or land 
areas. He concluded that these represented huge 
swamps, in which the variation in the depth of the 
water produced the diversity of colour. 

The vast extent of the continents was furrowed 
upon every side by a network of numerous lines or 
fine stripes of a more or less pronounced dark 
colour, whose aspect was very variable. They 
traversed the planet for long distances in regular 
lines, not at all resembling the winding courses of 
rivers on the Earth. Some of the shorter ones 
were only a few hundred miles in length, but others 
extended for thousands of miles, extending over as 
much as one- third of a circumference of Mars. 
Some of these lines or channels (canali) were very 
easy to see; others were extremely difficult and 
resembled the finest thread of spider's web drawn 
across the disk. The breadth of some may be as 
great as one or two hundred miles; of others, not 
more than twenty miles. 

The conclusion that Schiaparelli drew from his 
long-continued observations was that these channels 
were fixed configurations on the planet. Their 



MARS THE PLANET OF SPENT LIFE 179 

length and arrangement were constant or varied 
only within narrow limits, and each one began and 
ended between the same regions. But their ap- 
pearance and degree of visibility varied greatly 
from one opposition to another and even from one 
week to another. The variations in the appearance 
of the different channels were not simultaneous, 
but appeared to occur capriciously, so that one 
might become indistinct or even invisible whilst 
another in its vicinity became at the same time 
conspicuous. The channels intersected one another 
at all possible angles, but usually at the small dark 
spots, which Schiaparelli interpreted as lakes. Every 
channel opened at its end into either a sea, or a 
lake, or into another channel. None of them was 
cut off in the middle of a continent, remaining 
without beginning or end. 

His considered conclusion in 1893 was that the 
canali were truly great furrows or depressions in the 
surface of the planet, destined for the passage of 
water. The changing appearance of the channels he 
attributed to inundations resulting from the melting 
of the snows, followed by the soaking away of the 
water and its eventual drying up. He added that 
the network of the channels was probably a 
geological formation and that it was not necessary 
to suppose them to be the work of intelligent beings. 

The most surprising feature about the canals (we 
shall henceforth use the term that has come into 
general use) was their doubling. This occurred, 
according to Schiaparelli, who first announced it 
in 1882, principally in the months preceding and 
following the melting of the polar cap. In the 



l8o LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

course of a few days, or even of a few hours, a canal 
would change its appearance and be transformed 
throughout its length into two lines or uniform 
stripes, more or less parallel to one another, which 
ran straight and equal with the exact geometrical 
precision of the two lines of a railroad. The two 
canals, he asserted, followed very nearly the direc- 
tion of the original canal and ended where it ended. 
One of the two might follow the course of the 
original canal or it might be that they would lie on 
either side of it. The distance between the two 
canals might range from about thirty miles to three 
or four hundred miles. 

The doubling did not occur at the same time for 
all those canals that showed the phenomenon, but 
was produced here and there, in an isolated irregular 
manner and without any recognisable order. At 
different oppositions, the doubling of the same canal 
produced different appearances, as to width, 
intensity and arrangement. It was therefore con- 
cluded that the doubling could not be due to a 
fixed formation on the surface of Mars, of a geo- 
graphical character like the canals. 

Schiaparelli added: " Their singular aspect, and 
their being drawn with absolute geometrical pre- 
cision, as if they were the work of rule or compass, 
has led some to see in them the work of intelligent 
beings, inhabitants of the planet. I am very careful 
not to combat this supposition, which includes 
nothing impossible. 53 He went on to consider 
various suggested explanations that had been put 
forward to account for the appearance and con- 
cluded: "The examination of these ingenious 



MARS THE PLANET OF SPENT LIFE l8l 

suppositions leads us to conclude that none of them 
seem to correspond entirely with the observed facts, 
either in whole or in part. Some of these hypotheses 
would not have been proposed, had their authors 
been able to examine the doubling with their own 
eyes. Since some of these may ask me directly, 
Can you suggest anything better ? I must reply 
candidly, No." 

The conclusions reached by Schiaparelli from his 
long-extended observations of Mars have been given 
in some detail because they had the effect of giving 
an immense stimulus to the study of Mars. The 
news that changes could be seen occurring on the 
surface of Mars was interpreted by some as provid- 
ing evidence that there were intelligent beings on 
Mars for, it was argued, the numerous canals 
following straight or regular paths could not be 
natural formations, but must have been artificially 
made. This interpretation was violently combated 
by others; Schiaparelli, as we have seen, kept an 
open mind on this question; he did not accept it 
as proved, though he did not regard it as impossible. 

The great protagonist of the theory of the artificial 
nature of the canals was the American, Percival 
Lowell, who in 1894 founded an observatory at 
Flagstaff, in Arizona, for the special purpose of 
studying the planets, and Mars in particular. The 
site for the observatory, at a high altitude in the 
dry region of Arizona, was selected for the excellence 
of the atmospheric conditions. There, for many 
years, Lowell and his assistants studied Mars 
assiduously, whenever it was sufficiently well placed 
for observation, and accumulated a mass of in- 



l82 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

formation about the changes that occur on its 
surface. 

One of the early discoveries made at the Lowell 
Observatory was that the dark areas of the planet, 
which had hitherto been regarded as seas, showed 
a considerable amount of detail and that they were 
crossed, like the ruddy areas, which had hitherto 
been regarded as continents, by canals. Changes 
both of colour and form occurred in these dark 
areas and it was concluded that such changes were 
primarily of a seasonal character. These results 
provided conclusive evidence that the dark areas 
could not be seas, in the ordinary sense of the word. 
If they were watery areas, they must be more in the 
nature of marshland. The conclusion to which 
Lowell came was that the dark areas were regions 
where there was vegetation, the fertile regions of 
Mars, in contrast to the ruddy-coloured regions, 
which represented the arid desert regions, where no 
vegetation could grow. 

The changes that were found to occur in the dark 
areas were of two kinds : some were quite irregular 
whilst others were considered to be seasonal in 
character. There can be no doubt that at times 
well-marked changes occur over considerable areas, 
which are not of a seasonal nature. Thus, for 
instance, a certain marking observed by Schiaparelli, 
and named by him Lacus Mceris^ could not be found 
by Pickering at Arequipa in 1892. It reappeared 
with perfect distinctness, and was observed by 
Lowell, in 1903, after an interval of thirteen years 
since it had last been seen. Another marking, 
called Lacus Solis, showed a marked change between 



MARS THE PLANET OF SPENT LIFE 183 

1924 and 1926, being extended much farther to the 
north in the later year; by 1928, it had recovered 
its normal appearance. Such large-scale changes 
are relatively infrequent. 

The visibility of many other markings was found 
by Lowell to change in a regular seasonal manner. 
The general character of these changes were the 
same. Soon after the beginning of the melting of 
the ice-cap in the summer hemisphere, the canals 
begin to become visible in the polar regions adjacent 
to that cap. The darkening of the canals spreads 
gradually and progressively towards the equator 
and beyond it, into the opposite hemisphere, at the 
rate of about fifty miles a day. At the same time 
occur changes of colour of the dusky markings, 
from a light to a darker green and later to brown 
and yellow. These changes were attributed by 
Lowell to a transference of water from the melting 
pole cap towards and beyond the equator, the 
transference being accompanied by the growth of 
vegetation. 

These simple and regular changes, proceeding in 
harmony with the progression of the seasons on 
Mars, have not been altogether confirmed by other 
observers. It might be thought that regular 
changes, recurring with the seasons, would be easy 
to establish. It must be remembered, however, 
that at any single opposition Mars is sufficiently well 
placed for observation for only a few months; as 
the length of the Martian year is 687 days, the 
advance in the seasons during the time over which 
observations can extend at any one opposition is 
not very great. In order to observe Mars through- 



184 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

out one complete cycle of the seasons, it would be 
necessary to continue observations for fifteen years. 
Moreover, because the rotation of Mars is about 
37 minutes slower than the rotation of the Earth, 
there is a slow falling behind in the longitudes of 
Mars presented centrally to the Earth at the same 
hour on successive nights. In consequence, any 
given marking is only well placed for observation 
for about a fortnight consecutively, during which 
time there may be only one or two nights with good 
conditions for observation. After this time the 
marking becomes unfavourably placed at the hours 
suitable for observation and cannot be observed 
again for about a month. 

It will be clear that it is by no means easy to 
follow the changes in the surface markings through 
a complete cycle of the Martian seasons. A further 
complicating factor is that it is not possible to take 
advantage of photography to give a permanent 
record of the appearance of the planet at a given 
instant because, as we have already explained, 
most of the detail on the surface is too fine to be 
recorded by the photographic plate; the record of 
the appearance of the planet must, therefore, be 
provided by the observer drawing what he sees. A 
good observer is not necessarily a good draughts- 
man, however, and conversely the good draughts- 
man may not be a good observer. But however 
good the draughtsman, it is by no means an easy 
matter to portray faithfully the detail seen on the 
face of the planet, in its varied light and shade, with 
proper contrasts of colour and with the positions 
and sizes of the various markings shown in their 



MARS THE PLANET OF SPENT LIFE 185 

proper relationship one to another. Much of the 
detail that the observer is striving to portray is at the 
limit of vision and only to be glimpsed momentarily 
at rare intervals. In the circumstances, it would 
not be surprising to find that the observer had 
tended at times to concentrate his attention on 
certain details and at other times to concentrate it 
on different details. The difficulty of excluding the 
possibility that seasonal changes in fine detail do not 
arise in this way, and that they are not of subjective 
origin, will be appreciated. 

Lowell claimed also to have observed the doub- 
ling or pairing of certain canals, previously 
announced by Schiaparelli, as we have already 
mentioned. He asserted that the majority of the 
canals were persistently and perpetually single, but 
that a proportion of them at times appeared mysteri- 
ously paired, the second canal being an exact 
replica of the first, running by its side throughout 
its whole length and keeping equidistant from it, 
like the two lines of a railway track. The distance 
between the two canals of a pair varied, according to 
Lowell, from about seventy-five miles to 400 miles. 

We shall now consider briefly the interpretation 
placed by Lowell upon his observations. He 
suggested that we must try to see ourselves as others 
see us. Suppose that we could do away with the 
clouds that at any moment cover much of the sur- 
face of the Earth and that we looked at the Earth 
from Mars or Venus. From such a distance the 
local merges into the general aspect and, at intervals 
of six months, an interesting and beautiful trans- 
formation would be seen to spread over the face of 



l86 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

the Earth the vernal flush of the Earth's awakening 
from its winter sleep. This would be revealed 
through the growth of vegetation starting in temp- 
erate latitudes and moving progressively toward the 
pole, the tint deepening the while. The wave of 
awakening on the Earth would travel from equator 
to pole, whereas on Mars it journeys from pole to 
equator. The difference, according to Lowell, was 
of fundamental significance for the interpretation of 
the changes observed on Mars. The growth of 
vegetation is dependent, provided certain other 
essential requirements are satisfied, on the Sun's 
rays and the presence of moisture. On the Earth 
water is almost always available, except in desert 
regions, but, unless it is called by the Sun, vegetation 
never wakes. After the Sun has departed south in 
the autumn, the vegetation in northern latitudes 
must await its return in the spring. 

Mars, according to Lowell, was otherwise circum- 
stanced. Not merely was the warmth from the Sun 
needed to awaken the vegetation to growth but it 
was also needed indirectly to provide the water 
supply. There is no surface water on Mars and the 
annual unlocking of a water supply, provided by 
the melting of the snows of the polar cap, was needed 
before the vegetation could commence to grow. 
The growth must, therefore, start at the pole, 
where the water supply first becomes available, and 
it then follows the frugal flood towards the equa- 
torial regions. 

The next step in the argument was that though 
vegetable life could reveal itself directly, animal life 
could not. " Not by its body, but by its mind 



MARS THE PLANET OF SPENT LIFE 187 

would it be known. Across the gulf of space it 
could be recognised only by the imprint it had made 
on the face of Mars." This imprint he recognised 
in the canals, the long straight markings, which 
were just such markings as intelligence might have 
made. The unnatural regularity of these markings, 
as Lowell drew them, made it impossible to believe 
that they could be natural features. There was the 
additional fact that many of the canals converged 
to dusky patches at their junctions, the so-called 
oases, and passed from one oasis to another in an 
absolutely unswerving direction. " The observer 
apparently stands confronted with the workings of 
an intelligence akin to and therefore appealing to 
his own. What he is gazing on typifies not the out- 
come of natural forces of an elemental kind but the 
artificial product of a mind directing it to a pur- 
posed and definite end. 35 

He therefore concluded that the canals were 
artificial channels, made by intelligent beings, to 
carry the melting water from the poles across the 
surface of the planet, passing from point to point by 
the shortest possible paths. It follows, if this inter- 
pretation is correct, that Mars must be a world 
devoid of mountains. As the water travels along 
these channels, the irrigation makes it possible for 
vegetation to spring up along their banks and where 
the canals meet, at the oases, are the fertile regions 
where the Martian beings live. 

Some explanation is required of how the water 
manages to flow from the pole to the equator and 
beyond. It cannot be flowing down hill all the 
way; if it were down hill from the pole to the 



l88 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

equator, the water would be running uphill after 
crossing the equator. Therefore, the water must 
have been artificially conducted over the face of the 
planet. There must be a great pumping system, on 
a scale far surpassing any of the works of man, and 
this in itself presupposes an advanced type of in- 
telligence. Lowell calculated that the power re- 
quired would be four thousand times the power 
of the Niagara Falls. 

And what is the motive for this gigantic irrigation 
system ? That is readily found. It is provided by 
the instinct for self-preservation on the part of a 
world that is becoming increasingly arid. In the 
struggle for existence, water must be got. The 
Martians saw in the growing scarcity of water the 
premonition of their doom. All other questions 
became to them of secondary importance in com- 
parison with the vital urge to obtain water. The 
only places where water is in storage and whence it 
may be got are the poles : hence the whole economy 
of life on the planet must centre round making this 
water available for the needs of life. As the great 
occupation of the Martians must accordingly be 
that of getting water, is it to be wondered at that it 
is the fruits of this occupation that have revealed 
their existence to the eyes of man ? 

Only with an intelligent population, but not 
otherwise, would the inevitable progressive desicca- 
tion of the planet be foreseen. The water supply 
would not fail in a moment; it would be a slow 
gradual process. Local needs would urge the 
reaching out to a distant supply, as is already being 
done on our Earth for the provision of adequate 



MARS THE PLANET OF SPENT LIFE 189 

water supplies for large towns and cities. The steps 
to greater and still greater distances would follow 
one by one until eventually the surface of the planet 
was covered with a vast network of channels, 
making water available and enabling vegetation to 
grow. 

Lowell concluded his book, entitled Mars as the 
Abode of Life , with these words: " A sadder interest 
attaches to such existence: that it is, cosmically 
speaking, soon to pass away. To our eventual 
descendants life on Mars will no longer be something 
to scan and interpret. It will have lapsed beyond 
the hope of study or recall. Thus to us it takes on 
an added glamour from the fact that it has not long 
to last. For the process that Brought it to its present 
pass must go on to the bitter end, until the last spark 
of Martian life goes out. The drying-up of the 
planet is certain to proceed until its surface can 
support no life at all. Slowly but surely time will 
snuff it out. When the last ember is thus extin- 
guished, the planet will roll a dead world through 
space, its evolutionary career forever ended. 55 

Such, in brief, was Lowell's theory: attractive, 
ingenious and logical, provided that the observa- 
tional basis can be accepted. But that is where the 
rub came, for though there were observers of Mars, 
many of them possessed of moderate-sized instru- 
ments, who confirmed Lowell's observations, there 
were other observers who were unable to see the 
essential phenomena upon which his theory was 
based ; some of these were observers of great acuity 
of vision and of considerable reputation, with large 
instruments placed where the conditions for observa- 



LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

tion were particularly favourable. The whole 
question of the nature of the detail to be seen on 
Mars and of its interpretation became a matter of 
violent controversy. Time has passed; the con- 
troversy has died down; there is now a general 
consensus of opinion about what can be seen on 
Mars. Let us take stock of the situation and see 
what we can fairly accept as established beyond the 
possibility of doubt. 

The main argument in favour of the Martian 
civilisation was the artificial appearance of the net- 
work of canals shown on the maps of Mars, com- 
piled by Lowell and others. There is no denying 
that the maps do have a very artificial appearance. 
But they are compiled from many separate drawings 
and all the canals shown on a map are never seen at 
once; only a few are visible on any one night. 
Nevertheless a few canals are sufficient to give a 
very artificial appearance. It must be emphasised, 
on the other hand, that though the drawings may 
have been most carefully made, the planet itself if 
we could approach sufficiently near it would 
doubtless look entirely different in its main features 
from any of the drawings and would not appear at 
all artificial. 

The question at issue is not whether the canals 
exist or not. There can be no question about the 
existence of at least the most conspicuous of them. 
Some can be seen in telescopes of moderate size and 
a few have been photographed. The photographs 
reproduced in Plate 14, perhaps the best photographs 
of Mars that have been obtained, show some of 
the canals clearly. The question about which 



MARS THE PLANET OF SPENT LIFE 

there has been so much controversy is whether 
these features of the Martian surface are the 
straight, narrow, sharply defined lines, which they 
appear to be in Lowell's drawings. Dr. Barnard, 
an experienced observer with a very keen eye, 
who had the advantage of observing with some of 
the largest telescopes in America, saw them as 
ill-defined, irregular, diffuse shadings, which were 
not of uniform breadth and were not always even 
continuous. Observing with the great sixty-inch 
reflecting telescope at Mount Wilson, a telescope 
much more powerful than Lowell had at his dis- 
posal, he said that Mars gave " the impression of a 
globe whose entire surface had been tinted a slight 
pink colour, on which the dark details had been 
painted with a greyish coloured paint, supplied with 
a very poor brush, producing a shredded or streaky 
and crispy effect in the darker regions. " He 
added that " no one could accurately delineate the 
remarkable complexity of detail of the features 
which were visible in moments of the greatest 
steadiness. 35 M. Antoniadi, who has studied the 
planets for many years with the great refractor at 
Meudon, agrees with Barnard. The general con- 
sensus of observational opinion, in fact, is in agree- 
ment with Barnard that the canals do not form a 
sharply defined geometrical network but that they 
are broad, diffuse and irregular in outline. 

The appearance of the canals has been described 
by Dr. Waterfield, who is Director of the Mars 
Section of the British Astronomical Association, and 
who has observed Mars for many years. He states 
that " when he first started observing Mars he 



IQ2 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

found that he was inclined to see more or less 
linear detail upon the disk. But as time passed 
that tendency grew less and less, and he began to 
see the detail more like what he now considers to 
be its actual appearance. It undoubtedly takes 
many years for the eye to become trained for the 
appreciation of the finest telescopic detail. Before 
that is accomplished, it is liable to see hazy dis- 
continuous streaks as narrow and continuous lines, 
to interpret a complex system of light and dark 
shadings as a more or less linear geometrical pattern, 
and even to join up the longer and quite obvious 
markings by lines that do not possess any objective 
reality. He finds that this tendency is still liable 
to recur when the planet is far from the Earth and 
difficult to observe, when our atmospheric conditions 
are poor, and when telescopes of smaller size are 
used. Under normally good conditions he sees 
the canals as wide and diffuse streaks which often 
form the border of a more extensive shading and 
are generally irregular in width and sometimes 
discontinuous. Finally, under the very best at- 
mospheric conditions which occur only momen- 
tarily on comparatively few nights in the year 
some of these streaks remain while others melt 
away into a background of more complex structure." 
There is a subjective tendency for the eye to 
connect up detail in the form of irregular shadings 
and markings, which are almost at the limit of vision 
and glimpsed only with difficulty, by continuous 
lines. The following experiment is easily made. 
Draw a row of dots, one-eighth of an inch apart, 
on a piece of paper and look at it from a distance 



MARS THE PLANET OF SPENT LIFE 193 

of about thirty feet. The separate dots will not be 
seen; they will appear to form a continuous, 
uniform line. Because the canals appear to be 
continuous or because some of them have been 
recorded on photographs it does not necessarily 
follow that they are continuous. 

It must not be thought that there is any question 
of dishonesty or bad faith on the part of the ob- 
servers to account for, such extremes as the deli- 
neations of Lowell and Barnard. These two 
observers studied Mars for many years under 
favourable conditions and both were trained and 
experienced observers; each of them has honestly 
recorded the appearance of the planet as he saw it. 
The only possible explanation of the differences is 
that the observation of these faint elusive details is 
subject to complex personal differences. The ob- 
server looks in the telescope and an image is formed 
on the retina of the eye. He has to interpret what 
he sees and to transfer the impression in his mind 
into a drawing. Differences of visual acuity must 
certainly be an important factor. One observer 
may look at the image of a twin star, whose two 
components are separated by a very small amount, 
and see clearly that the star is double; another 
observer will see the star as a single star. Sub- 
conscious interpretation of what is faintly glimpsed 
may be very different for two different persons. 
The eye of one may tend to bridge the gap between 
faint details and to draw a marking as a uniform, 
straight, continuous line unless he can clearly see 
that there are irregularities, bends and discontinu- 
ities in it. Another may only draw it in this way 

13 



194 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

when he can see beyond the possibility of doubt 
that it is uniform, straight and continuous. 

The truth may lie somewhere between the two 
extremes, though it appears probable that Barnard's 
delineation is the nearer approach to the truth. If 
the canals are as sharp and straight as Lowell 
depicted them, it seems incredible that other 
observers, if they could see them at all, should not 
also see them as sharp and straight. The experi- 
ment was tried of placing a diagram, on which 
there were scattered a number of dots of various 
sizes, short lines and shady patches in an irregular 
manner, before a class of school children, who were 
told to draw what they could see. Many of them, 
particularly those at the back of the room, con- 
nected up the more prominent features with straight 
lines. It is much more likely that the eye will tend 
to connect up disconnected structure in this way 
and to represent it as continuous than that it will 
tend to break up continuous structure into dis- 
connected patches. 

Lowell's representation of paired canals seems to 
provide positive proof that his observations were 
liable to subjective error. If two lines are drawn 
in ink on white paper and viewed from a distance 
with a 6-inch telescope, it is not possible for the 
eye to separate them unless the angular separation 
is at least one second of arc. This arises from the 
fact that, for optical reasons, the telescopic image 
of a sharp line is not perfectly sharp; the image is 
somewhat broadened : if there are two lines suffi- 
ciently close together, the images will converge into 
one another so that no eye, however acute, can 



MARS THE PLANET OF SPENT LIFE 195 

possibly separate them. The limiting separation of 
one second of arc, for a 6-inch telescope, is inferred 
from optical theory and confirmed by observation. 
Lowell, however, with a six-inch telescope recorded 
paired canals whose separation was as small as 
0-26 second. His own assistant expressed grave 
doubts about the objective reality of the duplication, 
and other experienced observers have not been able 
to confirm the existence of these paired canals. 

The observations and deductions of Lowell have 
been described in some detail because of their great 
interest for the present purpose of considering the 
evidence for or against life on the planets. The 
conclusion which it seems reasonable to accept is 
that the geometrical network of narrow straight 
canals does not exist. There is no doubt that there 
are faint markings in the form of hazy streaks, 
which are fairly straight and seem to be pretty 
continuous. Under conditions of exceptional steadi- 
ness, they appear to resolve into finer and more 
complicated detail. It is doubtful, therefore, 
whether these markings are really continuous and 
it is idle to speculate about their nature. We must 
abandon Lowell's theory of an artificially con- 
structed network of water channels and accept the 
canal markings as natural formations. The dif- 
ference in the topography of the Earth and the 
Moon serves as a reminder that other worlds need 
not necessarily bear any close resemblance to the 
Earth in surface features. It was suggested by 
Dr. W. H. Pickering that the canal formations 
might be due to volcanic cracks lying between 
craterlets on the Martian surface; water-vapour 



196 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

might escape from these craterlets and cracks and 
nourish vegetation growing along their sides; it is 
this vegetation and not the crack itself that would 
be visible in the telescope. 

We must lay aside all these speculations and 
preconceived notions, however captivating to the 
imagination they may be, and consider without bias 
what information about Mars has been substan- 
tiated by further observation and what conclusions 
can legitimately be drawn from it. 

We consider first what direct observational 
evidence there is of an atmosphere on Mars. In 
our survey of the solar system we have so far 
encountered some worlds, such as the Moon and 
Mercury, whose surface we can see but which are 
devoid of an atmosphere, and other worlds, such 
as Venus and the major planets, where there is 
ample evidence of an atmosphere but where we are 
unable to see the solid surface. When we come to 
Mars, we are able to see the surface and we expect, 
as we have already mentioned, to find an atmo- 
sphere. The seasonal change in the size of the 
polar caps provides indirect evidence that there 
must be an atmosphere. When the polar cap melts 
with the advance of the summer season, there must 
also be some evaporation of moisture; if Mars had 
entirely lost its atmosphere, it must also have lost 
this water-vapour in the course of ages and the 
material of which the polar caps are formed would 
gradually have been completely dissipated away 
into space. 

But we do not have to rely, fortunately, merely 
on indirect evidence of an atmosphere on Mars. 



MARS THE PLANET OF SPENT LIFE IQ7 

Direct evidence of an atmosphere was provided by 
Dr. Wright who, at the Lick Observatory, by using 
appropriate colour filters, photographed Mars by 
the light of different colours. Photographs by 
infra-red light, which has penetrating or haze- 
cutting properties, showed the surface detail clearly; 
the photographs in the ultra-violet light showed 
practically no trace at all of surface features. 
This is illustrated in Plate 12, which shows a ter- 
restrial landscape and Mars photographed in infra- 
red and ultra-violet light respectively. The ter- 
restrial landscape represents the view from the top 
of Mount Hamilton, looking towards the distant 
mountains across the intervening valley. In the 
infra-red photograph the detail is clearly shown, 
but in the ultra-violet photograph all that can be 
seen is a faint outline of the crest of the distant 
mountains. There was sufficient haze in the 
atmosphere to scatter the light of short wave-length 
to such an extent that all detail was lost. The 
comparison of the two photographs of Mars, which 
were taken on plates identical with those used for 
the terrestrial photographs, shows that the ultra- 
violet light is scattered by a Martian atmosphere 
to such an extent that it is not able to penetrate to 
the surface of the planet and out again, whereas the 
infra-red light, which, because of its longer wave- 
length, is not scattered so much, can get through the 
atmosphere to the surface of the planet and out 
again. 

By employing special filters, Dr. Wright also 
photographed Mars with red, yellow, green and 
blue light and found that the surface detail became 



198 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

less and less distinct as the wave-length of the light 
used became shorter and shorter. The whole series 
of photographs provides a progressive sequence from 
the infra-red photograph in which the surface detail 
is clearly seen, the detail becoming progressively less 
distinct until in the ultra-violet photograph there is 
practically no evidence of any surface features. 

The photographs revealed another interesting 
fact. The images of Mars on the photographs taken 
with the ultra-violet light are larger than those 
taken with the infra-red light. This is clearly 
shown in Plate 14. In the latter case we obtain 
an image of the solid planet itself; in the former 
case we have an image of the atmospheric shell 
surrounding Mars. The difference in size of the 
two images corresponds to a difference of fifty 
or sixty miles in the true radii, so that the atmosphere 
of Mars has a considerable depth. Comparison 
with terrestrial photographs taken under favourable 
conditions suggests that the Martian atmosphere, 
though evidently of considerable depth, is never- 
theless very tenuous and that the total atmospheric 
pressure on Mars does not amount to more than a 
few per cent, of that at the surface of the Earth. 
The force of gravitation at the surface of Mars is 
only two-fifths of the force at the surface of the 
Earth, so that if Mars and the Earth had atmo- 
spheres which, under standard conditions of pres- 
sure, were of the same thickness, the atmosphere of 
Mars would extend to a much greater height than 
the atmosphere of the Earth. 

Further confirmation of an atmosphere on Mars 
is provided by the occurrence of clouds, which can 



MARS THE PLANET OF SPENT LIFE IQ9 

not only be seen in the telescope but can also be 
photographed. The clouds are of two types, those 
that appear white to the eye and those that appear 
yellowish. The white clouds are best seen on the 
ultra-violet photographs and are barely visible, if 
seen at all, in the infra-red photographs. Such 
clouds must occur fairly high up in the atmosphere 
because, if they were at a low level, the ultra-violet 
light would not penetrate to them; they must be 
sufficiently thin to allow the infra-red light to pass 
through them, otherwise they would appear more 
conspicuously on the infra-red photographs. These 
white clouds are somewhat rare; they have a 
tendency to begin to form at about Martian noon 
and to increase in size during the afternoon, as the 
temperature falls. The formation and growth of 
one of these clouds is illustrated in Plate 13. It 
is probable that they are produced by the con- 
densation of moisture, as a result of the fall in 
temperature. They tend to be most conspicuous, 
therefore, at sunset, when they are near the edge 
of the disk. They may occasionally be seen, by 
direct observation of Mars in the telescope, project- 
ing beyond the edge of the disk. It then becomes 
possible to make an estimate of the height of the 
cloud above the surface of the planet; heights up 
to twelve miles have been found in this way. 

The second type of cloud, the yellow cloud, is 
more frequently seen. Such clouds are shown on 
the infra-red but not on the ultra-violet photo- 
graphs. They must, therefore, be at a fairly low 
level in the atmosphere. An example of a yellow 
cloud is shown in Plate 13. These clouds appear 



200 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

yellowish to the eye, but the lack of contrast between 
them and the ruddy surface of the planet makes 
them rather difficult to see. A very large area of 
the planet is sometimes covered by the yellow 
clouds, which obliterate partially or entirely the 
underlying surface details; they may persist in the 
same region for some time, occasionally for as long 
as several weeks. It has been suggested that the 
yellow clouds are clouds of dust raised by winds 
blowing over the extensive desert areas of the 
planets. 

The polar caps show a surprising difference in 
appearance in the photographs taken with light of 
long- and short wave-length. The usual explana- 
tion of the caps is that they are surface deposits of 
snow or hoar frost in the polar regions, analogous 
to the snow- and ice-caps of the polar regions of the 
Earth. The only other white solid substance of 
which they could consist is solid carbon dioxide 
(commercially known as "dry ice "). Solid 
carbon dioxide volatilises at low pressures, such as 
must exist on Mars, at temperatures appreciably 
lower than the observed temperature of the caps 
and the possibility that the caps may consist of solid 
carbon dioxide can, therefore, be excluded. If the 
polar caps are merely surface deposits, we should 
expect them to be clearly shown on the photographs 
in light of long wave-length but to be invisible on 
the photographs in light of short wave-length, 
whereas, contrary to expectation, they are seen 
most clearly on the latter photographs. The polar 
caps must, therefore, be largely, though not entirely, 
an atmospheric phenomenon. It is probable that 



MARS THE PLANET OF SPENT LIFE 2OI 

over the polar regions there are clouds, like high 
cirrus clouds on the Earth, of no very great thick- 
ness, so that light of long wave-length can get 
through them and that there is in addition a surface 
deposit of snow or ice. 

This deposit cannot be of any great thickness 
because, unlike the ice-caps of the Earth, it dis- 
appears almost entirely in the course of the summer 
months. It is quite easy to prove by calculation 
that the caps cannot be very thick. The intensity 
of the Sun's radiation at the distance of Mars is 
known and we can calculate how thick the cap 
must be in order that the whole amount of heat 
received by the cap during the time that the Sun 
is above the horizon, and assuming that none is lost 
by reflection or radiation, will just suffice to melt it. 
The thickness found on these assumptions is the 
maximum possible and is only about six feet. But 
most of the heat falling on the cap will be reflected 
or radiated back and will not be available for melting 
the ice; the true thickness must consequently be 
very muchJLess than six feet and probably does not 
amount to more than a few inches on the average, 
except in the very near neighbourhood of the pole. 
The whole quantity of water that would be ob- 
tained by the melting of one of the polar caps would 
not be more than sufficient to fill a large lake about 
the size of Wales. A lake of such a size appears to 
be entirely inadequate to supply the large quantity 
of water that, according to Lowell's theory, was 
pumped for thousands of miles across the surface of 
Mars for purposes of irrigation. 

And what about the composition of the Martian 



2O2 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

atmosphere ? Water-vapour there must undoubt- 
edly be. Although there are no qpen seas on Mars, 
the existence of the polar caps and their melting as 
the summer advances, together with the evidence 
of clouds, afford sufficient proof that the atmosphere 
must contain water-vapour. The amount of the 
water-vapour is so small, however, that it can be 
detected only with the greatest difficulty. The 
attempts to detect it have almost invariably ended 
in failure. At the Lowell Observatory, which is in 
Arizona at a height of 7,250 feet above sea-level, 
Dr. Slipher, in 1908, by comparing the spectra of 
Mars and the Moon, when at the same altitude 
and under conditions of exceptional atmospheric 
dryness in the winter, found that the water-vapour 
absorptions were slightly stronger in the spectrum 
of Mars than in that of the Moon. This slight 
difference in intensity must have been produced by 
the water-vapour in the atmosphere of Mars. 
Usually the absorption by water-vapour in the 
Earth's atmosphere is so strong that the much more 
feeble absorption in the atmosphere of Mars is 
entirely masked. 

All attempts to detect oxygen in the atmosphere 
of Mars have been unsuccessful, and it can be con- 
cluded that the amount of oxygen is not more than 
one-thousandth part of the amount in the Earth's 
atmosphere. Indirect evidence of oxygen is pro- 
vided by the ruddy colour of Mars, which is unique 
amongst the heavenly bodies. This red colour is 
suggestive of rocks that have been completely 
oxidised and it may be contrasted with the grey or 
brownish colour of the rocks on the Moon, which 



MARS THE PLANET OF SPENT LIFE 203 

have remained unoxidised because of the absence of 
oxygen. It appears probable that Mars may be a 
planet where the weathering of the rocks, followed 
by their oxidation, has resulted in the almost com- 
plete depletion of oxygen from the atmosphere. 

Carbon dioxide has not been detected in the 
Martian atmosphere. This is not surprising be- 
cause carbon dioxide must be present in large 
quantity before it will produce absorptions of 
sufficient strength to be detected. 

The temperature of Mars is much in accordance 
with what we should expect to find for a planet 
somewhat more remote than the Earth from the 
Sun. In the Martian tropics the temperature rises 
well above the freezing-point at noon and may 
reach 50 F. or a little more. The dark areas are 
somewhat warmer than the reddish areas. The 
observed temperature of the polar caps in winter is 
very low, about 70 C.> corresponding to about 
125 degrees of frost on the Fahrenheit scale. This 
temperature possibly refers to the upper surface of 
the cloud layer above the pole, in which case the 
temperature at the surface may be appreciably 
higher. At midsummer, the temperature at the 
poles rises somewhat above freezing-point. 

In the afternoon, as the Sun gets lower, the 
temperature falls very rapidly. This is because 
there is only a scanty atmosphere, with very little 
water-vapour, to act as a blanket, and prevent the 
escape of the long-wave heat radiation from the 
surface rocks, which have been heated by the Sun 
during the day. Water-vapour is very effective in 
preventing the escape of the heat radiation from 



2O4 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

the surface of a planet. Anyone who has lived in a 
moist tropical climate knows that t||re is very little 
fall of temperature at night, whereks in dry desert 
regions, though the day temperature may be much 
higher than in moist tropical regions, the night 
temperature is much lower because of the rapid fall 
of temperature after sunset. The maximum temp- 
erature on the Earth does not usually occur at noon, 
when the Sun is highest in the sky, but during the 
afternoon. This is because of the blanketing action 
of the water-vapour in the atmosphere, which 
prevents the rapid escape of radiation from the 
heated surface of the Earth and causes the temp- 
erature to continue to rise for a few hours after the 
Sun has reached its greatest altitude. But on Mars 
the temperature is highest at noon and begins to fall 
immediately afterwards. By sunset the cold has 
become intense ; the minimum temperature at night 
is about 130 F. The diurnal range of tempera- 
ture between noon maximum and night minimum 
is thus very great, being about equal to the differ- 
ence between the freezing- and the boiling-points of 
water. 

The climate of Mars may be said to resemble that 
of a clear day on a very high mountain. The solar 
radiation by day is rarely tempered by cloud or 
mist. By night there is rapid radiation from the 
soil into space and intense cold. The climate is one 
of extremes. The changes of temperature from day 
to night and from one season to another are very 
great. The seasons are longer than on the Earth 
and their length accentuates the difference between 
summer and winter conditions. The seasonal 



MARS THE PLANET OF SPENT LIFE 205 

changes are more pronounced in the southern 
hemisphere thari in the northern. The distance of 
Mars from the Sun varies by as much as twenty-six 
million miles in the course of its orbital passage 
round the Sun. Mars is nearest to the Sun when 
it is winter in the northern hemisphere and summer 
in the southern hemisphere ; it is at its farthest when 
it is summer in the northern and winter in the 
southern hemisphere. The southern hemisphere, 
therefore, has a warmer summer but a colder winter 
than the northern. 

We have been compelled to discard the evidence 
on which Lowell based his theory that a race of 
intelligent beings exists on Mars. May there not 
be sufficient evidence, however, to enable us to 
conclude that there is life of some sort, but not 
necessarily intelligent life, on Mars ? The temp- 
erature conditions are neither so high nor so low 
that the possibility of life can be excluded, though 
the great daily range of temperature and the rapidity 
of the changes would prove very trying for any 
form of life with which we are familiar. Water- 
vapour is certainly present in the atmosphere and 
there is evidence of oxygen, though the supply may 
be approaching exhaustion. There seems to be no 
reason why life on Mars could not have adapted 
itself to such conditions. 

That there are changes from time to time in the 
Martian surface we have already mentioned. 
Some of these changes appear to be seasonal; others 
are quite irregular. Lowell claimed to have 
established a wave of darkening spreading equator- 
wards as the ice-cap of the summer hemisphere 



2O6 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

melted. These claims have not been altogether 
confirmed by other investigators, who find the 
changes neither so simple nor so cigar cut. There is 
general agreement, however, that there are com- 
plete changes both in appearance and colour of 
various markings, which correlate with the seasonal 
changes. It is difficult to interpret these changes 
in any other way than by the seasonal growth of 
vegetation. The vegetation covers the dark regions 
of the planet, the rest of the surface being desert. 
As the ice-cap melts, the moisture reaches lower 
latitudes, possibly in the form of rivers or streams, 
but more probably as rain or dew. With the com- 
ing of the moisture, the vegetation commences to 
grow and the colour of the areas covered with plant 
growth changes to green. When winter comes on, 
the green colour gradually gives place to grey or 
brown. 

It has been suggested by Arrhenius that the soil 
in the dark areas is saturated with soluble salts, like 
the alkali flats or salt pans that are found in some 
of the desert areas of the Earth. These salts are 
hygroscopic and absorb moisture from the air when 
the melting of the pole-cap is in progress; the 
darkish mud formed when the salts deliquesce 
would account for the change in the appearance 
of the dark areas. He suggests that in this way 
the changing tints could perhaps be accounted for 
in the absence of vegetation. The suggestion does 
not seem to provide a satisfactory explanation of 
the sequence of colour changes recorded by ex- 
perienced observers of Mars. 

The irregular changes in appearance can be 



MARS THE PLANET OF SPENT LIFE 207 

attributed to modifications from year to year in the 
growth of vegetation, possibly produced by localised 
climatic variations from year to year. A particular 
region of the planet may receive one year a supply 
of moisture that is fully adequate for the scanty 
needs of the Martian vegetation; but another year, 
the supply over the same region may be insufficient 
for these needs and, because of the drought, there 
will be a more or less complete failure in the growth 
of vegetation. It is not to be expected that on 
Mars, any more than on the Earth, the climatic 
conditions at any particular place will be exactly 
the same each year. 

As we have mentioned, the colour of the surface 
of Mars provides sure evidence of the presence of 
free oxygen, at any rate in the past. The presence 
of free oxygen almost certainly demands the 
existence of vegetation. Combining this argument 
with the evidence from the changes that occur on 
the surface, we may conclude that it is almost 
certain that there is some form of vegetation on 
Mars. 

We cannot say whether animal life, and in 
particular whether higher forms of life, can exist on 
Mars. The small amount of oxygen on Mars seerris 
to make this improbable, though we know so little 
about life that the possibility cannot be entirely 
excluded. But the question whether or not such 
forms of life exist on Mars at the present time is 
surely of minor significance in comparison with the 
very strong evidence that life of some kind is to be 
found there. We started out on our survey of the 
bodies of the solar system not knowing what we 



PLATE 14 

THE PLANET MARS 

The upper portion of plate shows photographs of Mars 
taken on 1939, July 20 (upper left); July 23 (upper 
right) ; August 1 1 (lower left) ; August 3 1 (lower right) . 
These photographs were obtained by Dr. JefFers with 
the 36-inch refractor of the Lick Observatory, through 
a yellow screen, so that the contrast in the photographs 
is similar to that seen in visual observation of Mars. 
The bright cap at the south (upper) pole; the dark areas 
(regions of vegetation) ; and the light areas (desert 
regions) are well shown. The photographs show also 
finer markings which some observers have interpreted 
as artificial canals. 

The lower portion of the plate provides direct 
evidence that the atmosphere of Mars is of considerable 
depth. Images of the planet in ultra-violet and infra- 
red light are shown; below these the opposite halves of 
the two images have been juxtaposed to show that the 
ultra-violet image is the larger. The infra-red image, 
which shows the surface details, represents the solid 
globe of Mars; the ultra-violet image, in which no 
surface detail is visible, represents the solid globe sur- 
rounded by the atmospheric shell. The difference in 
size of the images indicates that the atmosphere of 
Mars has a depth of at least 50 miles. 



PLATE 15 

THE SPIRAL NEBULA, MESSIER 101, IN THE CON- 
STELLATION OF THE GREAT BEAR 

The objects termed spiral nebulae are stellar universes, 
lying outside our stellar universe, with which they are 
closely comparable in size and mass. The system, 
Messier 101, is seen broadside on, so that its spiral 
structure is clearly seen. Like our own stellar universe, 
it is slowly rotating in space. 

If our own universe could be viewed broadside on 
from a great distance, it would appear generally similar 
to this system. The condensations of stars in the spiral 
arms correspond to the star clouds in the Milky Way. 
Patches of bright nebulosity glowing gaseous matter 
and dark patches, caused by absorption of light by fine 
dust, may be seen; similar features are widespread 
throughout the Milky Way regions of our own Universe. 

The distance of this system is about i J million light- 
years. 

Photograph by Dr. Ritchey with the Go-inch reflector 
of the Mount Wilson Observatory, 1910, March 11. 
Exposure 7^ hours. 



2IO LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

should find but with the expectation that if con- 
ditions were suitable for life on any world, life 
would somehow have come into existence there. 
Our quest for conditions suitable for life to exist 
was unsuccessful until we came to Mars; on one 
world after another the conditions were found to be 
such that we could say with reasonable certainty 
that life could not possibly exist. Finally we came 
to Mars, when at length we found a world where 
the conditions were such that the possibility of life 
of some sort existing could not be excluded. And 
there we find clear evidence of changes taking place 
which we can only attribute to the growth of 
vegetation. If this conclusion is accepted, it follows 
that life does not occur as the result of a special 
act of creation or because of some unique accident, 
but that it is the result of the occurrence of definite 
processes; given the suitable conditions, these 
processes will inevitably lead to the development of 
life. 

But Mars, though the home of life, is a dying 
world. It has lost most of its atmosphere; it has 
lost most of its moisture. It may in the past ages 
have been the home of animal, and conceivably of 
intelligent, life. It does not seem that the present 
scanty supply of oxygen can be nearly adequate to 
maintain such life. Animals need oxygen to supply 
energy, through the process of combustion, which 
enables them to maintain the vital processes. 
Evolution may secure adaptation to gradually 
changing conditions but, with a progressively 
lessening supply of oxygen, there must come a time 
when adaptation can do no more and the moulding 



MARS THE PLANET OF SPENT LIFE 211 

powers of evolution succumb before an unequal 
struggle. So it seems to me that we must look upon 
Mars as a planet of spent life. Such vegetation as 
now continues to maintain a precarious existence 
must be doomed to extinction in a time which, 
geologically, is not remote. 

In Venus we saw a world where conditions are 
probably not greatly different from those that 
existed on the Earth many millions of years ago. 
In Mars, on the other hand, we see a world where 
conditions now exist which resemble those that will 
probably prevail on our Earth many millions of 
years hence, when much of our present atmosphere 
will have been lost. 



CHAPTER IX 



THE ORIGIN OF 
THE SOLAR SYSTEM 

WE have now concluded our survey of the solar 
system. With the significant exception of Mars, 
the search for any evidences of life has given a 
negative result. We have necessarily had to rely 
to a considerable extent upon the inferences that 
can be drawn from the general conditions prevailing 
on the other worlds that we have considered. The 
only world on which we might expect to see some 
direct evidence of animal life, if it existed, is the 
Moon. The surfaces of Venus and the major 
planets are permanently hidden from us by clouds 
and it would not be possible to obtain any direct 
evidence even of vegetation on these worlds, if such 
existed. The general considerations about the 
nature of life have served as a guide and our 
conclusions should be reasonably well established. 
The discussion of the conditions prevailing else- 
where in the solar systems has provided us with 
information that will be useful in trying to assess 
the probability that life may exist elsewhere in the 
universe. 

We have so far dealt only with the family of 
our Sun, which is merely an average star, one 
amongst the many stars, numbering a hundred 
thousand millions or so, in our stellar universe. 
And that universe in turn is merely one amongst 
many millions of more or less similar island 

212 



THE ORIGIN OF THE SOLAR SYSTEM 213 

universes each a gigantic system scattered 
through space. 

The question that naturally suggests itself is: 
What is the chance that life exists on some of the 
planets belonging to one or other of these innumer- 
able stars in our own universe or in some other 
universe ? This is a difficult question to answer, 
because if such planetary systems exist, they are 
far beyond our range of vision. If the nearest 
known star, twenty-five million million miles away, 
had a planet belonging to it of the size of Jupiter 
which is much the largest of the planets in our solar 
system we should not be able to see it. We must 
give up hope, therefore, of ever being able to see 
any of the planets that may belong to other stars. 
To learn anything about the conditions prevailing 
on such worlds is accordingly entirely out of the 
question. 

But we can perhaps obtain some guidance from 
general considerations. If we can find out how the 
solar system came into being we shall possibly be 
able to judge what likelihood there is that other 
stars may have families of planets. For the solar 
system has certainly not come into existence as the 
result of chance. It is not an accidental collection 
of bodies : there are too many regularities in the 
system. Let us look briefly at some of these 
regularities. 

In the first place, all the planets, including some 
1,500 minor planets, small bodies whose orbits lie 
between the orbits of Mars and Jupiter, revolve 
round the Sun in the same direction and their orbits 
lie nearly in the same plane. The inclinations 



214 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

of the planes of the orbits of the planets to the 
ecliptic, the plane of the orbit of the Earth, are 
mostly only a few degrees. With the exceptions of 
Pluto and of some of the asteroids, the largest 
inclination is 7 for the orbit of Mercury. The incli- 
nation of the orbit of Pluto is 17 and some of the 
minor planets have still large inclinations, but the 
orbits of these bodies may have suffered consider- 
able perturbations. The orbits, again with the 
exception of those of Pluto and of some of the 
minor planets, are nearly circular in shape. The 
Sun rotates in the direction in which the planets 
revolve and the orbits of the planets lie nearly in 
the plane of the Sun's equator; the planets also 
rotate in the same direction as the Sun. The 
orbits of the satellites, with a few exceptions, are 
nearly circular and lie nearly in the plane of the 
parent planet's equator. The satellites revolve 
around the planets in the same direction as that 
in which the planets themselves rotate, and their 
movements are therefore in the same sense as those 
of the planets. We may compare the solar system 
with a pack of cards as it comes from the makers, 
in which the cards are arranged in suits and each 
suit in order of value, rather than with a pack 
which has been used and shuffled. The regularities 
demand an explanation, but to find an explanation 
of how a system such as the solar system could have 
come into being has proved to be the most difficult 
of all the problems of cosmogony. 

The oldest hypothesis that we need mention 
seems first to have been suggested by that versatile 
Swedish scientist and theologian, Emanuel Sweden- 



THE ORIGIN OF THE SOLAR SYSTEM 215 

borg and, somewhat later but probably indepen- 
dently, by an Englishman, Thomas Wright, of 
Durham. It was adopted by the German philo- 
sopher, Immanuel Kant, in his essay on the general 
history and theory of the heavens, published in 
1755. Kant started from the assumption that the 
material, which now forms the Sun, the planets and 
their satellites, was formerly a diffuse nebula. He 
supposed that the different attracting powers of the 
various elements of this nebula would cause a loss 
of homogeneity; the heavier elements would tend 
to fall to the centre but their fall would be opposed 
by the tendency of the gas to expand. He im- 
agined that in this process lateral movements would 
be set up and that from these movements there 
would ensue a rotation of the whole mass. Kant 
was in error in supposing that rotation could be 
started in this way; this assumption is in direct 
opposition to one of the general principles of 
mechanics, the principle of conservation of angular 
momentum. 

As this principle is of great importance in dis- 
cussing the origin of the solar system, a few words 
in explanation will not be out of place. Without 
attempting any precise or strictly logical definition, 
the angular momentum of a body is a measure of the 
total quantity of rotational motion that it contains. 
Suppose, for instance, that the body is spinning 
around an axis, like the Earth. Imagine it to be 
divided up into equal parts, each weighing one 
pound. The angular momentum of any of these 
parts can be measured by the product of its velocity 
and its distance from the axis. The angular mom- 



2l6 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

en turn of the whole body is the sum of the ahgular 
momentum of all the parts. Consider, now, the 
Earth, which rotates on its axis once in the course 
of a day. If the Earth were to expand, the dis- 
tance of each part from the axis would be increased. 
As the total angular momentum must remain 
constant when no external forces are acting on the 
body, the velocity of each part must decrease to 
compensate for the increased distance from the 
axis; in other words, the rotation must be slowed 
down. The day would therefore become longer. 
Kant, in his theory, supposed that a general 
rotation developed out of local rotations. But 
these local rotations must have been some in one 
direction and some in another and the net effect 
was nil, for there was no rotation and no angular 
momentum to begin with. The total angular 
momentum must therefore have remained zero, 
so that the local rotations could never give rise to 
a general rotation. 

Kant's theory was revived in a modified and 
more scientific form by the great French geometer, 
Pierre Simon de Laplace, the Newton of France, 
in his Exposition du Systeme du Monde, published in 
1796. Laplace avoided the difficulty of explaining 
how the rotation had been started by postulating 
that the original diffuse nebula was itself in slow 
rotation. As the nebula cooled it gradually shrank 
and became more dense; at the same time, its rate 
of rotation necessarily increased, in order to con- 
serve its angular momentum. With increase in the 
rate of rotation the centrifugal force at the equator 
increased until at length it became equal to the 



THE ORIGIN OF THE SOLAR SYSTEM 2iy 

force t)f gravity. When this occurred, Laplace 
supposed that a ring of matter split off round the 
equator. The main mass went on contracting still 
further and in due course another ring would be 
shed and so on. The successive rings somehow 
condensed to form the planets; the planets them- 
selves passed then through a similar type of 
evolution, contracting and throwing off rings, which 
in turn formed the satellites. 

Laplace's exposition, though clothed in mathe- 
matical language, was semi-popular and purely 
qualitative. He did not discuss the problem in a 
mathematical or quantitative way to prove that the 
evolution of the primitive nebula must follow the 
course he suggested. The theory is attractive 
because it readily accounts for the motions of the 
planets and of their satellites being in the same 
general direction and nearly in the same plane, and 
for a long time it was accepted as providing a 
satisfactory explanation of the main features of the 
solar system. Unfortunately for the theory, how- 
ever, there are objections to it that are fatal. 

In the first place, Laplace assumed that a ring 
of matter would be thrown off around the equator 
of the contracting mass and that this ring would 
coalesce into a single body. He offered no proof 
of this assumption. On the other hand, it was 
proved by strict mathematical arguments by Clerk 
Maxwell in 1859 that coalescence into a single body 
could not occur, but that a ring of small bodies 
moving around the parent mass in similar orbits 
would result and that such a ring would form a 
stable configuration. The rings of Saturn provide 



2l8 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

an example of such a stable system consisting of a 
large aggregation of small discrete bodies. 

This objection is in itself sufficient to disprove 
Laplace's hypothesis in the form in which it ap- 
pears in the Systeme du Monde. But there is a further 
and equally serious objection. When we evaluate 
the angular momenta of the different members 
Sun, planets and satellites of the solar system, 
we find that Jupiter contributes more than half the 
total amount and that the four major planets 
between them account for about 98 per cent, of 
the whole. The remaining 2 per cent, is provided 
almost entirely by the rotation of the Sun itself, 
the four inner planets Mercury, Venus, the 
Earth and Mars together contributing only o-i 
per cent, of the total. Thus almost the whole of 
the angular momentum of the system is contributed 
by the four major planets, which have less than 
one-seven-hundredth of the total mass of the system. 
We know by the principles of mechanics that the 
angular momentum of the solar system at the pre- 
sent time must be equal to the angular momentum 
of the primitive nebulous mass, from which it is 
supposed to have been formed. The problem is to 
explain how nearly the whole of the angular momen- 
tum was captured by such a small portion of the 
whole system. 

We can look at the problem in another way. 
Suppose the Sun and all the planets were united to 
form a spherical nebulous mass of uniform density 
extending to the orbit of Pluto. We suppose that 
this mass is rotating with the period of revolution of 
Pluto, for a condensation within the mass must be 



THE ORIGIN OF THE SOLAR SYSTEM 2IQ 

assumed to have revolved with the same period as 
the mass itself. The angular momentum of such a 
system is found to be less than one- two-hundredth 
part of the actual angular momentum of the solar 
system. Since, in the process of contraction sup- 
posed by Laplace to have occurred, angular momen- 
tum could neither have been lost nor gained, it is 
certain that the present distribution of angular 
momentum could not have been produced in the 
way that Laplace supposed. The only possibility 
of accounting for the present distribution of angular 
momentum is to suppose that there was some 
process by which the angular momentum of the 
major planets was imparted to them from outside 
the Sun or primitive nebula by some force of a 
transitory nature. The origin of the solar system 
is not to be explained by the gradual cumulative 
action of internal forces; an explanation must be 
sought in the swift catastrophic action of forces 
from outside. 

Attempts have accordingly been made to account 
for the origin of the system by supposing that at 
some time in its past history another star passed 
very close to the Sun, narrowly avoiding an actual 
collision. Let us consider what sequence of events 
would be likely to occur. As the other star ap- 
proached the Sun, its gravitational attraction would 
distort the Sun by raising a tidal protuberance on 
it; the Sun would raise, in turn, a tidal protuber- 
ance on the approaching star. As the distance 
between the Sun and the star became smaller the 
tides raised on the two bodies would gradually 
increase more and more. Suppose the passing 



22O LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

star did not pass nearer to the Sun than a couple of 
million miles or so, the tide raised on the Sun would 
reach its maximum height when the star was at its 
nearest to the Sun and would then fall back as the 
star moved away, causing an oscillation or pulsa- 
tion in the Sun which would gradually be damped 
out by friction. 

Suppose, however, that the star passed so close 
to the Sun that its attraction on the nearest portion 
of the Sun's surface was greater than the force 
of the Sun's gravity; material would then be drawn 
out from the top of the tidal protuberance by the 
gravitational attraction of the passing star. The 
ejection of matter from the Sun would occur 
slowly at first but at a gradually increasing rate as 
the star drew nearer. The ejection would be most 
rapid when the star was at its nearest to the Sun 
and would become progressively less rapid as the 
star moved away, until at length it ceased alto- 
gether. Some of the material torn from the Sun 
would probably be captured by the passing star 
and some would probably escape into space. 
But some would remain under the control of the 
Sun's gravitation and it is supposed that the planets 
ultimately condensed out of this material. 

These assumptions have formed the basis of 
several theories of the origin of the solar system. 
Such theories have the advantage over the theory 
advocated by Laplace that the angular momen- 
tum of the planets can be attributed to the action 
of the passing star. The ejected material would 
form a jet curved towards the star and the angular 
momentum of this jet is derived from the angular 



THE ORIGIN OF THE SOLAR SYSTEM 221 

momentum of the star. After the encounter, the 
ejected material would be moving in the plane of 
the path of the star past the Sun and in the same 
direction round the Sun. The theories of this 
type thus account in a perfectly natural manner for 
the orbits of the planets and of their satellites being 
nearly in one and the same plane and for the 
direction of their revolutions being all the same. 
Closer examination is needed before we can say 
whether such theories are free from objection when 
considered quantitatively; they seem to be satis- 
factory when we consider them merely qualita- 
tively. 

The first theory of this nature was proposed 
about forty years ago by Professors T. C. Chamberlin 
and F. R. Moulton and is known as the " planet- 
esimal theory." Observations of the Sun show 
that its surface is in a state of continual disturbance 
and that, from time to time, incandescent material 
is thrown up with great force from the surface to 
considerable heights. Chamberlin and Moulton 
supposed that such disturbances, under the action 
of the gravitational pull of the passing star, resulted 
in huge eruptive bolts of matter being ejected from 
the Sun with great violence. From the opposite 
side of the Sun, where the attraction of the passing 
star was much smaller, another series 01 bolts, 
but of smaller size, were ejected. They supposed 
that the larger bolts ultimately gave rise to the 
major planets and the smaller bolts to the terres- 
trial planets. 

The material that was shot out from the Sun by 
the eruptions, enormously intensified by the tidal 



222 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

forces produced by the approach of the other star, 
would rapidly cool. Before long it would liquefy, 
to form a large number of separate small bodies, 
each moving around the Sun in its own orbit 
almost independently like a planet. Soon after- 
wards these would solidify. The separate small 
bodies were called planetesimals. Their distribution 
would not be uniform; the densest portions of the 
bolts would give rise to close aggregations or 
swarms of particles. It was supposed that these 
collected into solid cores, which became the nuclei 
of the planet. As these nuclei moved through the 
swarms of planetesimals, they gradually gathered 
them in, one by one, through the action of their 
gravitation, until at length the neighbourhood of 
the Sun had been swept clean. The numerous 
minor planets or asteroids arose from a mass of 
material which was deficient in any large nucleus, 
so that there was nothing to sweep them up. 
The satellites of the planets are supposed to have 
been formed from smaller secondary nuclei, which 
were saved from being drawn in to the larger nuclei 
by possessing a sufficient velocity to enable them to 
revolve around the parent planetary nucleus, just 
in the same way as it was the motion of these 
nuclei that kept them from falling into the Sun. 

Some of the material that had been drawn out 
from the Sun would, of course, fall back upon it, 
as the result of the gravitational pull of the Sun. 
This material had acquired angular momentum, in 
the same direction as the planets, from the passing 
star. When it fell back into the Sun, its angular 
momentum was communicated to the Sun, which 



THE ORIGIN OF THE SOLAR SYSTEM 223 

in this way acquired a rotation in the same direction 
as that in which the planets revolve round the Sun. 
A similar explanation can be used to account for 
the axial rotations of the planets. 

At the time that the planetesimal theory was 
put forward, very little was known about the 
propulsional forces that were responsible for the 
ejection of material from the Sun, seen in some of 
the eruptive prominences. It is now known that 
these forces arise from the pressure of the Sun's 
radiation; though this pressure can impart high 
velocities to particles of molecular dimensions, it 
is not competent to play the important role of a 
trigger releasing bolts of matter sufficiently massive 
to form the planets. This objection is avoided in a 
modified tidal-ejection theory proposed by Sir 
James Jeans. 

Jeans showed that the effect produced by the 
passage of the star past the Sun would depend 
upon the physical nature of the Sun. If the Sun 
were of uniform density throughout and incom- 
pressible in other words, very much like a solid 
body the effect would be to disrupt it into pieces 
comparable in size and mass with the parent 
body. If, on the other hand, the density of the 
Sun increases rapidly inwards, the disrupted frag- 
ments are small, and the mass of the Sun would 
not have been much affected. The ejected matter 
would have come from the outer layers of relatively 
low density. The density of the Sun must increase 
rapidly from the surface inwards towards the 
centre and the conditions therefore approximated 
to the second case. This being so, the passing star 



PLATE i 6 

SPIRAL NEBULA IN THE CONSTELLATION OF 
BERENICE'S HAIR 

The object reproduced on this plate is a spiral nebula 
seen almost exactly edge on. It illustrates the aptness 
of Herschel's description of our stellar universe as being 
a much-flattened system, shaped like a grindstone. The 
bright central nucleus will be noted, as well as the dark 
absorbing matter scattered through the median plane. 
Such absorbing matter, fine dust, is widely scattered 
through the central regions of the Milky Way, causing 
the Milky Way through a great part of its extent to 
appear to have two branches; the central portion is 
not seen through the fog of dust. 

If our own universe were viewed edgewise-on from a 
great distance, it would appear like this nebula. The 
Sun has a position about midway between the central 
nucleus and the outer edge. 

The distance of this system is about 6 J million light- 
years. 

Photograph by Dr. Ritchey, with the Go-inch reflector 
of the Mount Wilson Observatory, 1910, March 6-7. 
Exposure 5 hours. 



PLATE 17 

SPIRAL NEBULA, MESSIER 81, IN THE CONSTEL- 
LATION OF THE GREAT BEAR 

The spiral system is seen obliquely. Other systems 
can be seen at all angles of view, from broadside-on to 
edgewise-on, establishing the general similarity of the 
objects shown in the two preceding plates, though at 
first sight they would seem to have no points of re- 
semblance. 

The nebula. Messier 81, has a very bright nucleus. 
Aggregations of stars, in the form of star clouds, can be 
seen in the outer extensions of the spiral arms ; patches 
of dark nebulosity, caused by obscuring dusty matter, 
and of bright gaseous nebulosity are clearly visible in 
the inner regions. 

The distance of this system is about 2^ million light- 
years. 

Photograph by Dr. Ritchey, with the Go-inch reflector 
of the Mount Wilson Observatory, 1910, February 5. 
Exposure 4^ hours. 



226 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

would give rise to a tidal protuberance, from whose 
tip matter would be drawn out in the form of an 
elongated jet or filament. Jeans showed that 
unless this filament were of uniform density, which 
would have been extremely unlikely, there would 
be a tendency for the material to condense around 
any portions of greater density. The filament 
would therefore break up under its own gravitation 
and form a number of separate bodies which, after 
the disturbing star had gone its way, would move 
in orbits around the Sun. As the outflow of 
matter would be greatest when the star was at its 
nearest, the filament would be thickest near its 
middle, tapering off towards both ends. It is 
accordingly to be expected that the largest planets 
will be found in the median range of distance, with 
smaller planets at the two extremes of the range. 
This is exactly what we find in the solar system, 
Jupiter and Saturn being the largest and most 
massive planets whilst Mercury and Pluto are the 
smallest and least massive. 

As in the planetesimal theory, there would be 
a portion of the ejected material which would not 
be drawn in by gravitational attraction to any of the 
planetary aggregations. This would form a mix- 
ture of gaseous matter and solid particles. On 
either this theory or the planetesimal theory the 
motion of the planet through this material, which 
would act as a resisting medium, would make their 
orbits less elliptical and more nearly circular. 
At the same time the planets would gradually 
sweep up this material. The nearly circular shape 
of the orbits of the planets can thus be explained. 



THE ORIGIN OF THE SOLAR SYSTEM 227 

It is supposed that the satellites of the planets 
were formed in an analogous manner. The pass- 
ing star or the Sun, or possibly both, would have 
produced tides on the primitive planets, causing 
filaments of matter to be ejected which condensed 
into satellites. Just as some of the ejected material 
after falling back on to the Sun is supposed to 
have set it into rotation, so some of the material 
ejected from the planets is supposed to have fallen 
back on to their surface and to have set them into 
rotation. 

But this raises a difficulty. To explain the rapid 
rotation of Jupiter it is necessary to suppose, as 
was shown by Dr. H. Jeffreys, that the material 
falling back on to its surface had a mass about 
one-fifteenth of the mass of Jupiter, or about 
400 times the mass of all its satellites. It is not 
possible to believe that so small a proportion of 
the ejected material would condense to form 
satellites and that the bulk of the material would 
fall back to the surface of the planet. There are 
similar difficulties in accounting for the rotations of 
the other major planets Saturn, Uranus and 
Neptune and of Mars. 

Dr. Jeffreys showed that this difficulty could be 
avoided if somewhat more specialised conditions 
for the approach of the star to the Sun are assumed. 
Instead of supposing that the star passed the Sun 
at a distance of a couple of million miles or so, 
he supposed that there was an actual collision. 
The picture of what happened is then somewhat as 
follows. As the Sun and star drew near to one 
another, their velocities rapidly increased, under 



228 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

the influence of their rapidly increasing mutual 
gravitation, until at the instant of collision their 
relative velocity attained the enormous value of 
several hundred miles a second. The collision was 
neither a direct collision nor a grazing one, but 
sufficiently tangential for the heavy central cores 
of the two bodies to miss one another. 

Whilst the star was drawing rapidly near to the 
Sun, enormous tidal distortions would be raised 
both on the Sun and on the star, from which 
ejection of matter would begin to occur shortly 
before the actual collision took place. When the 
collision occurred, the outer layers of the two 
bodies within the area of impact would intermingle, 
whilst the heavy central portion of the star would 
pursue its headlong way and, swinging round in a 
hyperbolic path, would recede away into space. 

The intermingling layer, greatly compressed by 
the impact between the two bodies and intensely 
heated by friction, would be thrown into an ex- 
tremely turbulent state, with rapid rotation caused 
by the shearing motion of the two bodies. As the 
star moved away, this rapidly rotating layer would 
be stretched out all the way from the Sun to the 
star and would form a ribbon or filament, which 
would take the place of the tidal filament in the 
theory of Jeans. The whole of this stupendous 
catastrophe, leaving its permanent mark on the Sun 
in its system of planets, would be over in about 
an hour. 

Jeffreys showed that this hypothesis of an actual 
collision would account satisfactorily, not merely 
qualitatively but also quantitatively, for the rates 



THE ORIGIN OF THE SOLAR SYSTEM 22Q 

of rotation of the Sun and planets and for the total 
mass of material forming the planets. 

But in removing one difficulty we have intro- 
duced others of a different nature, though equally 
serious. The mass of the Sun was not much 
affected by the collision, which merely tore off a 
part of its outer layer of low density, leaving the 
heavy central core unaffected. The luminosity 
and size of a dwarf star like the Sun is determined 
primarily by its mass and it therefore follows that 
at the time of the collision the Sun was practically 
in its present state and, in particular, its size was 
near about what it now is. The temperature of 
the highly compressed and rapidly rotating layer 
from which the planets are supposed to have been 
formed must have been of the order of ten million 
degrees. At so high a temperature, the average 
velocities of the atoms are so great that the attrac- 
tion of the filament could not hold the material 
together. It would rapidly diffuse away into space. 
It is difficult to comprehend how bodies of the size 
of the major planets could have condensed out of 
such a filament. 

Suppose, however, for the sake of further argu- 
ment that this difficulty could be overcome. We 
still have to face an even more serious difficulty, 
whether we suppose that there was an actual 
collision between the Sun and the star or merely a 
close approach. This difficulty is concerned with 
the distribution of angular momentum in the solar 
system. If the amount of the angular momentum 
per ton of matter is calculated for each of the 
planets, we find that there is a steady increase 



230 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

outwards from the Sun. If we take the angular 
momentum per ton for the Earth as the unit in 
which to express the values of the angular momen- 
ta per ton of the other planets, the values increase 
from 0-6 for Mercury to 6-1 for Pluto. Now 
compare these values with the angular momentum 
per ton of the star. Suppose that the star was of 
about the same size and mass as the Sun and that 
at its nearest approach it was about 1,500,000 
miles from the centre of the Sun. Its angular 
momentum per ton can be shown to be about 0-25 
in the same unit. If, on the other hand, the star 
had actually collided with the Sun, the angular 
momentum per ton is found to be much smaller 
even than this value. 

The average angular momentum per ton of 
the planets is about ten times greater than the 
average angular momentum per ton of the in- 
truding star, if there was no collision. If a collision 
had occurred, the discrepancy becomes even 
greater. The difficulty is to explain how so much 
angular momentum could have been put into the 
matter ejected from the Sun. 

The difficulty involved can perhaps be better 
realised in this way. The angular momentum 
per ton depends upon two quantities: the distance 
of the matter from the Sun and its velocity at right 
angles to the direction to the Sun. If the matter is 
moving directly towards or away from the Sun, it 
has no angular momentum about the Sun. Now 
the velocity of the star was such that it flew in a 
hyperbolic orbit away into space; if any of the 
ejected matter had moved in the path of the star, 



THE ORIGIN OF THE SOLAR SYSTEM 231 

with the same velocity as the star, it would have 
done the same and would not have condensed into 
planets. How then has it happened that the 
matter that did condense into planets has acquired 
angular momentum (per ton) so much greater 
than the star and yet has not escaped into space 
but has remained bound by the Sun's gravitation, 
whilst the star was able to escape and has not 
remained held by the Sun's gravitation to form a 
double star ? We must remember that the matter, 
which subsequently condensed into the planets, is 
supposed to have been drawn out initially in a 
curved jet, stretching from the Sun towards the 
passing star. To have the requisite angular mo- 
mentum we need the matter to be moving at right 
angles to its direction to the Sun, instead of nearly 
in a radial direction. 

A mathematical discussion of the problem is 
needed for the difficulty to be fully appreciated, 
and such a discussion would be beyond the scope 
of the present book. The discussion shows that it 
is impossible to account for the angular momentum 
per ton of matter of the planets being so much in 
excess of the angular momentum per ton of matter 
of the star, whatever assumption is made about 
the speed and direction of approach of the star. 
Attractive as these theories of the origin of the solar 
system seemed at first sight, we are reluctantly 
compelled to discard them as unworkable. The 
hypothesis of an actual collision, introduced to 
provide a satisfactory explanation of the rapid 
rotations of some of the planets, proves to raise 
greater difficulty than the hypothesis of a close 



232 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

approach, when we consider the angular momenta 
of the planets per ton of matter. 

In order to avoid this very serious difficulty, a 
further modification of the theory has been at- 
tempted. Attention may here be drawn to the 
circumstances that each new objection raised 
against any theory of the origin of the solar system 
has to be overcome by the introduction of some new 
additional assumption, making the theory in itself 
less probable. But to account for the solar system, 
as it now exists, is so beset with difficulties that we 
cannot reject any theory, however improbable it 
may seem, if it gives a plausible explanation of 
how such a system could come into existence and 
if it encounters no serious objections. The solar 
system must have had an origin; if we cannot 
account for it except by the introduction of many 
special and somewhat artificial hypotheses, we shall 
have to conclude that the probability of other stars 
having systems of planets is very small. 

In the new modifications of the theory, suggested 
by Prof. H. N. Russell and developed by Dr. 
Lyttleton, it is supposed that before the encounter 
with the passing star, the Sun was a twin star. This 
is not in itself a very improbable assumption, for 
it is known that a considerable proportion of the 
stars, perhaps one in five, is a twin system. It is 
suggested that the Sun's companion was a good 
deal smaller than the Sun and that its distance 
from the Sun was comparable with the distance of 
the major planets. The passing star, which was 
much more massive, is supposed to have collided 
with the companion to the Sun, breaking it into 



THE ORIGIN OF THE SOLAR SYSTEM 233 

fragments and knocking it out of its orbit. The 
assumption that, if two stars collided, one of them 
would be broken up into several fragments of 
comparable size is not capable of verification by 
mathematical discussion and may not be correct. 
This is a weakness of the theory, which we must 
tentatively pass over. 

The passing star is assumed to have made an 
almost central collision with the companion and 
to have carried away with it most of the fragments, 
leaving merely the debris of the collision as the 
material which remained associated with the Sun 
to form the planets. Moreover, unless the plane of 
the orbit of the original companion about the Sun 
and the path of the intruding star were nearly 
parallel, the orbits of the fragments that remained 
after the collision would not be nearly in one 
plane and could not therefore lead to a system like 
our solar system. The theory thus abounds with 
special assumptions. But it gets round the two 
difficulties of the previous theories, the difficulty of 
accounting for the rapid rotations of the planets 
and the difficulty of accounting for their large 
angular momenta. The rotations of the planets 
are readily attributed to the collision and the 
angular momentum of the planets was derived from 
the shattered companion; it was there initially and 
the collision merely involved redistribution of the 
initial angular momentum amongst the fragments. 

There has been a good deal of controversy about 
whether this theory of the origin of the solar 
system can be made to work. Very special con- 
ditions are required for the intruding star to be 



234 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

able to get away, carrying along with it the bulk of 
the disrupted companion of the Sun, whilst leaving 
behind sufficient material to form the planets. 
A complicating factor is that mathematics is not 
able to trace out in detail exactly what would hap- 
pen. It seems not impossible, however, that with 
specially arranged conditions, in which not very 
much latitude can be allowed in any particular, the 
solar system might have been produced by a col- 
lision between an intruding star and a companion 
to the Sun. But so many special assumptions are 
involved that it has been remarked that the solar 
system had a very narrow escape from never 
coming into existence. 

Though this is not a valid argument against the 
theory, there are many who are disinclined to 
accept a theory which seems so inherently im- 
probable. This is not a logical attitude. Unless 
we can find a more plausible origin for the solar 
system, we must provisionally accept any theory 
that can be made to work. If the theory is im- 
probable we are able, at any rate, to infer something 
about the likelihood that other stars may have 
systems of planets circulating about them. This 
will give us a clue whether life is likely to be wide- 
spread throughout the universe or to occur only 
exceptionally. 

On any theory that requires either a near 
approach of a star to the Sun or an actual collision, 
it must follow that planetary systems are of very 
exceptional occurrence. The stars are so thinly 
scattered through space that the chance of a close 
approach of any two stars is extremely small. 



THE ORIGIN OF THE SOLAR SYSTEM 235 

The nearest known star is 25 million million miles 
away; it is obvious that, with stars at this sort of 
distance apart, it will be a very exceptional thing 
for one star to pass near or actually to collide with 
another. As it is difficult to conceive of distances 
measured by millions of millions of miles, we can 
get a picture that the mind can more readily grasp 
in this way. Suppose we have a hollow globe the 
size of the Earth, 8,000 miles in diameter, and that 
we put half a dozen tennis balls inside it and allow 
them to fly about in any direction, rebounding 
from the wall when they hit it. The chance that 
two of these balls will collide is about equal to the 
chance that two stars will come into collision. 

The chance that two stars will actually collide 
was computed by Sir James Jeans. He found that 
a given star will be likely to meet with an actual 
collision only once in 600,000 million million 
(6 X io 17 ) years. The chance of two stars approach- 
ing each other sufficiently closely, without an actual 
collision, to give rise to the ejection of a tidal 
filament is somewhat, but not much, greater. 

From these figures we can make an estimate of 
the number of stars that are likely to have experi- 
enced a close approach to another star. As a 
rough, but sufficiently close estimate, we will sup- 
pose that any given star makes a close approach to 
another star on the average once in 500,000 
billion 1 (5 X io 17 ) years. The average age of the 
stars is believed to be greater than 10,000 million 
(io 10 ) years. It follows that not more than one 
star in fifty million is likely to have collided, or 

1 Billion is used to denote one million million. 



236 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

nearly to have collided, with another star in the 
whole of its life. In our own stellar universe the 
number of stars is of the order of 100,000 million. 
These stars are not distributed uniformly; there are 
localised aggregations or clusterings where the star 
density is above the average and regions where the 
stars are relatively sparse. If we assume that the 
star density in the vicinity of the Sun is sufficiently 
representative of the system as a whole, it will 
follow that in our own stellar universe there are not 
likely to be more than several hundred stars that, at 
some time or other in the course of their life, have 
had a close approach to another star, which ap- 
proach has resulted in the ejection of a tidal filament 
of matter. 

No great exactitude can be claimed for these 
figures. But, after making adequate allowance for 
all possible uncertainties in the data, there is no 
escape from the conclusion that the number of 
stars in our stellar universe which in the course of 
their lifetime have made a close approach to 
another star is very small a mere few hundred. 
Until recently it was thought that each such close 
approach would result in the formation of a 
planetary system; but now, as we have already 
mentioned, it is realised that this is far from being 
so and that it is only under very specialised assump- 
tions that the theory could be made to work. 
The close approach will lead to the ejection of a 
stream of matter from the great tidal bulge drawn 
up on the star; but this matter will normally be 
dissipated away into space and will not condense 
into discrete planets, held bound to the parent Sun 



THE ORIGIN OF THE SOLAR SYSTEM 237 

by the force of gravitation. To ensure this, we 
have been compelled to assume that the Sun was 
initially a double star; and not only so but, in order 
to make the theory workable, it becomes necessary 
to impose special conditions on the nature of the 
encounter between the two stars. There are 
limitations to the direction and velocity of approach 
of the intruding star which are necessary if a system 
like the solar system is to result from the encounter. 
The effect of these limitations is very seriously to 
reduce the chance that a close encounter between 
two stars will give birth to a system of planets. 
Precise estimation of the probability is not possible 
but it seems likely that out of several hundred 
encounters, each sufficiently close to result in the 
ejection of matter from the tidal protuberance, 
there can at the most be very few that give rise to 
planetary systems. Our solar system appears, 
therefore, to be a system that is nearly, though per- 
haps not quite, unique in our stellar universe. 

There is one possible way of escape, however, 
from this conclusion. For the estimate of the chance 
of a close approach of two stars has been based 
upon the observed average distance apart of one 
star from another and it is implicitly assumed that 
this distance has remained the same throughout the 
lifetime of the stars. Modern investigations sug- 
gest, on the contrary, that the validity of this assump- 
tion is doubtful: that, in fact, the stars may have 
been very much closer together when the Earth 
and the other planets were born than they are at 
the present time. 

It would lead us too far afield to go fully into the 



238 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

reasons for this conjecture. There are, however, 
two main lines of approach. The first line of 
approach is through the consideration of the prob- 
lem of the source of stellar energy. The age of the 
Earth is somewhere about 3,000 million years; 
the Sun must be at least as old as the Earth. And 
for this period of time it has been lavishly pouring 
out energy in the form of heat and light into space. 
Where does this energy come from ? This is a 
problem that has occupied astronomers for many 
years. Lord Kelvin suggested that the Sun was 
contracting under its own gravitation; the process 
of contraction would release energy, which the 
Sun radiates away into space. It is now known that 
energy provided in this way would not maintain 
the Sun's radiation for more than about 20 million 
years. When radioactivity was discovered, it was 
thought that this might provide an explanation; 
but the supply of energy that could be provided 
again proved hopelessly inadequate. 

Meanwhile, more precise information about the 
age of the Earth was being obtained and it was 
realised that the only processes that could main- 
tain the Sun's radiation for thousands of millions 
of years must be of an atomic nature. There 
were two main alternatives. The energy might be 
derived from the actual annihilation of matter or 
from the building-up of heavier atoms from atoms 
of hydrogen. The modern conception of matter is 
that it is built up of elementary particles, protons 
and electrons, of positive and negative electricity. 
If we could bring a proton and an electron together, 
so that their charges coalesced and neutralised one 



THE ORIGIN OF THE SOLAR SYSTEM 239 

another, both particles would disappear and a 
splash of energy would result. The amount of 
energy locked up in the atom, which might con- 
ceivably be released in this way, is prodigious. 
From one ounce of coal we should obtain sufficient 
energy to run engines of a total horse-power of 
100,000 h.p. for one year; in other words, the fuel 
requirements of a large generating station could be 
satisfied by a fuel supply of one ounce of coal a 
year. If annihilation of matter provided the 
source of the energy of the stars, they would be 
able to maintain their output of energy without 
very serious diminution for millions of millions of 
years. For a time, indeed, various considerations, 
into the details of which it is not necessary to enter 
here, led astronomers to believe that the ages of 
the stars were, in fact, of the order of millions of 
millions of years. It seemed, therefore, that the 
process of annihilation of matter must actually be 
taking place within the intensely hot interiors of the 
stars. 

There was a difficulty, however, which could not 
easily be resolved. Investigations into the internal 
constitution of the stars led to the conclusion that 
the temperatures at the centres of the stars were 
of the order of from 10 to 20 million degrees. 
Theoretical considerations suggested that the anni- 
hilation of matter could not occur at temperatures 
below some thousands of millions of degrees. The 
supposition that annihilation of matter can occur 
in the interior of the stars appears, therefore, to be 
untenable. 

We are consequently thrown back on the alterna- 



24O LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

tive that the energy of the stars is derived from the 
building up of heavier atoms from atoms of hydro- 
gen. A helium atom can be built up from four 
atoms of hydrogen. But the weight of the helium 
atom is less than the weight of the four hydrogen 
atoms by about i part in 140. From four pounds 
of hydrogen we could only obtain about 3 Ib. 
15^ oz, of helium. What has happened to the 
missing half-ounce ? It is accounted for by the 
energy that has been released in the process. We 
can suppose also that elements heavier than 
helium are built up from hydrogen atoms; the 
energy set free is then greater, though not appre- 
ciably greater, than in the building up of helium. 
The energy obtained by building up heavy atoms 
from other lighter atoms, with the exception of 
hydrogen, is also relatively small. It is the first 
step in the process of building up, the formation of 
helium from hydrogen, that provides the bulk of 
the energy that can be derived by the atom- 
building processes. It is conceivable that, in the 
beginning, all matter consisted of the elementary 
particles and that the heavy elements have been 
built up stage by stage from these particles. The 
process can go on until we arrive at the heavy 
atoms, such as those of radium, thorium and 
ceranium, which are inherently unstable and which 
spontaneously disintegrate. 

The energy that can be released by atom-build- 
ing processes is only about one per cent, of the energy 
that can be provided by the annihilation of matter. 
The time during which the stars can continue 4 to 
radiate is therefore much shorter. The Sun con- 



THE ORIGIN OF THE SOLAR SYSTEM 24! 

tains at present about one- third part by weight of 
hydrogen; the other two- thirds consist of heavier 
elements. Whilst the age of the stars can be ex- 
tended to several million million years if annihila- 
tion of matter takes place, the age is limited to 
about 10,000 million years if annihilation does not 
occur and atom-building provides the main source 
of energy. As the age of the Earth is about 3,000 
million years, it would seem that the stars cannot 
be much older than the Earth itself, a conclusion 
that is somewhat unexpected. 

The second line of approach to the question 
whether the stars were closer together when the 
planets were born than they are now is through 
the information that has been obtained about the 
expansion of the universe. It has been found by 
observation that the various stellar universes, the 
so-called spiral or extra-galactic nebulae, are all 
receding from each other, with speeds that are 
proportional to their distances apart. From which- 
ever of these universes observations are made, the 
other universes appear to be receding from it, and 
the more distant the universe the faster is its velocity 
of recession. This has been interpreted as evidence 
that the Cosmos as a whole is expanding. Imagine a 
rubber balloon being inflated and suppose that on 
its surface we have marked a number of ink-dots, 
As the balloon expands, each dot will increase its 
distance from every other dot and the rate of in- 
crease of the distance between any two dots will be 
proportional to that distance. This is analogous 
to what we observe in the motions of the various 
stellar universes. 

16 



242 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

The rate at which these universes are receding 
from each other is such that all distances are 
doubled in about 1,300 million years. If this rate 
of recession had remained constant in past time, it 
would follow that the various universes were very 
much closer together when the solar system was 
formed than they are now. If we go back some- 
what farther in time, we should find that they were 
all crowded together in a relatively small volume of 
space; if our conclusions about the ages of the stars 
are correct, it was then that the stars were born. 

When we seek to probe backwards in time, we 
do not seem to be able to get beyond a time a few 
thousand million years ago. At such a time in the 
past, we find the various universes congregated 
close together in a volume of space much smaller 
than they now occupy; at such a time the stars were 
born; at such a time the solar system itself was born. 
It seems as though time stood still until all sorts of 
things began to happen and time began to move. 
Exactly what did happen at that time, and why it 
happened, we do not know. It has been suggested 
that at this epoch, which measures for us the 
beginning of time, all the matter in the entire 
Cosmos was closely packed together that there 
was in the beginning, in fact, one great Atom. 
Something then happened that was in the nature of 
an explosion; the Cosmos was shattered and frag- 
ments were hurtled in all directions through space. 
They would continue to move with their initial 
velocities and, at any subsequent time, the fastest- 
moving fragments would naturally be found to have 
moved to the greatest distances. The appearance 



THE ORIGIN OF THE SOLAR SYSTEM 243 

would be exactly that revealed by observation, of 
an expanding universe. At about this same time, 
or perhaps shortly afterwards, the stars were born. 
In these early ages, when the universe as we know 
it was beginning to take shape, the stars must 
have been much closer together than they now are. 
Collisions and close approaches between stars, or 
between dense aggregations of stars, must have been 
frequent, and it is possible that in all this turmoil 
the birth of planetary systems may have been 
widespread. 

A way of escape from the impasse into which we 
were landed in our attempts to account for the 
origin of the solar system may thus be provided. It 
had seemed that such a combination of initial con- 
ditions was required to enable the system to come 
into existence that the system must be almost 
unique; it now appears that the conditions under 
which the system was born may have been so differ- 
ent from those which are now revealed to us by 
observation that we cannot draw any certain con- 
clusions. Though we are still unable to say in 
detail how the solar system originated, we are 
probably correct in concluding that it is by no 
means so exceptional as we had thought and that 
there are likely to be many other stars, in addition 
to the Sun, which 'are accompanied by systems of 
planets. 



CHAPTER X 

BEYOND THE SOLAR SYSTEM 

IN the preceding chapter we discussed in some 
detail the origin of the solar system in the hope that 
we might be able to estimate the likelihood that 
other stars may have families of planets. We found 
that no definite answer was possible because we 
could not say with certainty how the solar system 
had come into being. It has proved to be one of 
the most difficult problems of astronomy. If the 
stars have always been distributed in much the 
same way as they are at present, we seem to be 
forced to the conclusion that the proportion of stars 
that have families of planets must be extremely 
small. We cannot be certain, of course, that we 
may not have overlooked some possibility. There 
seems to be no obvious loophole in the arguments, 
and I can see very little hope that the solar system 
will be explained by means of some event in the 
Sun's history that might equally well have happened 
to the majority of the stars. Provided that the dis- 
tribution of the stars has not greatly changed in the 
past, it seems almost certain that very exceptional 
circumstances are required to explain the origin of 
the solar system. 

Such was the position until recent years. The 
theory of the expanding universe was then formu- 
lated to provide an explanation of the observed 
motions of the distant universes, which appear to be 
all receding from us, the more distant the universe 

244 



BEYOND THE SOLAR SYSTEM 245 

the greater being the velocity of recession. I use 
the word appear advisedly, because the theory of 
the expanding universe is based upon a particular 
interpretation of observations. If a body which is 
sending out radiations is moving towards us, the 
radiations are compressed and appear to us to be of 
shorter wave-length than they would if we were on 
the moving body; if the body is moving away from 
us, the radiations that we receive appear to be of 
longer wave-length. This change of wave-length 
due to motion is exemplified when a train passes 
with its whistle blowing, by the sudden drop in 
pitch of the note of the whistle as the train 
passes and instead of moving towards us is moving 
away. 

The radiations that compose the light received 
from the distant universes are of longer wave-length 
than corresponding radiations from terrestrial 
sources. This is the observational fact which is 
interpreted as due to motions of recession of the dis- 
tant universes. But is this necessarily the only in- 
terpretation ? It has been suggested, for instance, 
that the light from these remote systems is in some 
way modified in the course of its long journey 
through space. Whether the observed changes in 
wave-lengths of the radiations from the remote 
systems are due to their motions or to a slow pro- 
gressive change in wave-length as the light travels 
through space is a question that can ultimately be 
decided by observation. It is hoped that the great 
two-hundred-inch telescope, now in course of con- 
struction, will make a decision between the two 
alternatives possible; the great light-gathering 



246 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

power of this giant telescope, enabling it to explore 
space to much greater distances than any existing 
telescope, will be invaluable for this purpose. 

If these observations prove that the conception of 
the expansion of the universe is not correct, we shall 
no longer have any reason to suppose that the 
average distances of the stars from one another were 
ever much different from what they now are. If, 
on the other hand, the observations prove that the 
universe as a whole is now in a state of expansion, 
what can we legitimately infer about its past his- 
tory ? To suppose that there has been a uniform 
expansion from an initial highly condensed condi- 
tion is to make an assumption which, though it may 
possibly be correct, is without any justification from 
observation. The course of events in a changing 
universe can be discussed by mathematics, and it 
appears that there are various possibilities: a 
uniform expansion is one; pulsation, with alternate 
periods of expansion and contraction, is another. 
We have no means of deciding which course the 
universe has actually followed. It may be true, or 
it may not, that the average distance apart of the 
stars was at one time much less than it is at present; 
planetary systems may be relatively few in number 
or, on the other hand, they may be far more 
numerous than was believed until recently. 

Whichever view we incline to take, however, we 
are certainly not justified in supposing that the solar 
system is unique. It has somehow come into exist- 
ence, and it is not logical to suppose that other 
systems could not come into existence in a similar 
way. The probability might be extremely small, 



BEYOND THE SOLAR SYSTEM 247 

and yet the number of planetary systems in the 
whole universe could be considerable, because the 
number of stars in each of the separate stellar 
universes and the number of these universes are 
both very great. It has been estimated that there 
are about 100 million universes in the region of 
space that can be probed by the one-hundred-inch 
telescope; if the number of stars with a family of 
planets did not average more than one per universe, 
the total number of planetary systems would still be 
considerable. It seems to me that we cannot avoid 
the conclusion that the total number of planetary 
systems must be very large. 

But the existence of other planetary systems, 
though a necessary condition for life to exist else- 
where in the universe, is not a sufficient condition. 
In any planetary system everything seems to be 
weighted against the possibility of the existence of 
life; a somewhat precise adjustment of conditions is 
needed in order that life may be possible. If the 
planet is very near its parent Sun, it will be too hot 
for life to exist; if it is very far away, it will be too 
cold. If it is very much smaller than the Earth, it 
will have been unable to retain any atmosphere. 
If it is much larger, it will have retained too much 
atmosphere; for when the gravitational attraction is 
so great that hydrogen cannot escape from the 
atmosphere the formation of the poisonous gases, 
ammonia and marsh-gas which we found in the 
atmosphere of Jupiter and Saturn appears to be 
almost inevitable. There seems to be little chance 
that life can exist on any world if that world differs 
greatly from the Earth in size and weight; it must 



248 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

be neither very much smaller than the Earth nor 
very much larger. 

But this is not the only restriction. The stars 
differ enormously in candle-power or luminosity. 
There are some stars, called giant stars, whose 
luminosity is many thousands of times greater than 
that of the Sun. There are other stars, called 
dwarf stars, whose luminosity is very much smaller 
than that of the Sun. Thus, for instance, Canopus 
is about eighty thousand times more luminous than 
the Sun; the Sun, on the other hand, is about sixteen 
thousand times more luminous than the faint com- 
panion of the bright star Procyon. If the Sun were 
replaced by Canopus, the Earth would become so 
intensely hot that all life, both plant life and animal 
life, would cease at once. The surface of the Earth 
would be seared as though by the blast from a 
furnace and the oceans would be rapidly vaporised. 
If the Sun were replaced by the companion of 
Procyon, the Earth would receive so little warmth 
that all the oceans would be frozen and the cold 
would be so intense that life would again be out of 
the question. Thus not only are there somewhat 
narrow limits to the size of a planet if it is to be 
the home of life, but also for any given parent 
Sun there are somewhat narrow limits of distance 
within which the planet must be situated in 
order that it may be neither too hot nor too cold 
for life. 

In the case of the solar system, if the Earth 
were as near the Sun as Mercury is, it would be 
too hot for any life to be possible on it; if, on 
the other hand, it were as far from the Sun as 



BEYOND THE SOLAR SYSTEM 249 

Jupiter, it would be much too cold for life to be 
possible. 

A somewhat precise adjustment of two factors, 
the size of the planet and its distance from its parent 
Sun, thus seems to be essential if life is to be possible 
on the planet. It is not enough to have either 
factor satisfied without the other. There may be 
many planetary systems entirely devoid of life, 
either because the planets are too large or because 
they are too small or because they are too near the 
parent Sun or are too remote from it. It is not 
possible to make any estimate of the proportion of 
planets that will fall within the appropriate limits 
of size and of distance from the parent Sun, though 
the proportion is likely to be small. 

To sum up the argument: the conditions needed 
for birth to be given to a planetary system may be 
so exceptional that amongst the vast number of stars 
in any one stellar universe we may expect to find 
only a very limited number that have a family of 
planets; and amongst these families of planets there 
cannot be more than a small proportion where the 
conditions are suitable for life to exist. Life else- 
where in the universe is therefore the exception and 
not the rule. If we could travel through the 
universe and survey each star in turn, we should not 
find life here, there and everywhere. Occasionally 
in our wanderings we should find a star with a 
family of planets; few of these could be the home of 
life, but some there would be which would comply 
with our requirements. If the proportion of 
planets on which life can exist is not more than one 
in a thousand, or even one in a million, the total 



25O LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

number of worlds that are suitable for life would 
yet be considerable, so vast is the scale on which 
the universe is constructed. 

It may still be objected that even where condi- 
tions are suitable for life to exist there may be no 
life. We cannot hope ever to have any direct 
information about these remote worlds; we can 
only be guided by what we have learnt from the 
study of worlds near at hand. The evidence that 
there is vegetation on Mars is almost conclusive, 
and affords very strong presumptive evidence that 
life will appear when conditions are suitable for it. 

It is idle to try to guess what forms life might 
take in other worlds. The human mind cannot 
refrain from toying with the idea that somewhere 
in the universe there may be intelligent beings who 
are the equals of Man, or perhaps his superiors; 
beings, we may hope, who have managed their 
affairs better than Man has managed his. Neither 
the investigations of the astronomer nor the investi- 
gations of the biologist can help us in this matter. 
It must remain for ever a sealed book. But it is 
unlikely that evolution has followed a parallel 
course on any two worlds. Small differences in 
conditions, in climate, in temperature, in atmo- 
sphere and in topography, may prove of funda- 
mental importance. As evolution proceeds, it may 
well be that here and there it branches off into this 
or that direction, when some slight change of 
conditions perhaps trivial in itself might have 
resulted in a branching off into some different 
direction, changing entirely the whole subsequent 
development. 



BEYOND THE SOLAR SYSTEM 25! 

There is one further point to mention, the ques- 
tion of the time scale. If we could move not 
merely through space but backwards and forwards 
in time, we should probably find life appearing, 
passing through its sequence of evolution, reaching 
its zenith of attainment and then passing away on 
one world after another. Our study of the Sun's 
family of planets suggested that Mars is a world 
long past its prime and that Venus is a world that is 
perhaps destined to be the home of life in the future. 
The zenith of life will not occur at the same time on 
all the worlds that are capable of supporting life: it 
may be that life in its most highly developed stages 
will not persist on any particular world for more 
than a small fraction of its life-history. 

So we come to the end of our quest. We have 
seen that throughout the whole universe there is an 
essential uniformity in the structure of matter. 
The same few elements occur everywhere, to the 
remotest parts of the universe that we have been 
able to study. They are the bricks from which all 
matter from its simplest to its most complex forms 
are built up. We have seen also that matter 
obeys the same laws throughout the universe. The 
chemistry of the carbon atom is of fundamental 
importance in building up the great variety of the 
extremely complex molecules that form the basis of 
living matter. The carbon atom must play the 
same key part wherever in the universe life may be 
found. This leads us naturally to the conclusion 
that living matter is possible only under somewhat 
specialised and restricted conditions. These re- 
strictions serve as a guide in estimating the likeli- 



252 LIFE ON OTHER WORLDS 

hood that life may be found to occur on this world 
or on that world. 

We have assumed that if the required conditions 
for life to be possible are obtained life will auto- 
matically make its appearance. This assumption 
may be criticised as unjustifiable in the absence of 
any knowledge as to how life originated on the 
Earth. Yet it appears more plausible than any 
other assumption that we can make and receives 
some confirmation from the fact that we have direct 
evidence of life though admittedly only of plant 
life on Mars, which is the only planet where we 
might expect to find any evidence of life at the 
present time. 

But life is not widespread in the universe. The 
blazing suns, which we call stars, are far too hot to 
permit of the existence of any but the simplest 
chemical compounds. It is only on the cooler 
planetary bodies that we can hope to find life. Life 
is not possible, however, on the large majority of the 
planets: some have no atmospheres, others have 
atmospheres that are poisonous; some are too hot, 
others are too cold. And not more than a small 
proportion of the stars are likely to have any planets 
at all. With the usual prodigality of Nature, the 
stars are scattered far and wide, but only the 
favoured few have planets that are capable of sup- 
porting life. The radiations from millions upon 
millions of stars are being sent out, and for thousands 
of millions of years have been sent out, into space. 
An almost insignificant fraction of the radiations 
from a star here and a star there is utilised in making 
life possible on an attendant planet; the great bulk 



BEYOND THE SOLAR SYSTEM 253 

of the radiation is merely destined to travel on 
endlessly through space. 

Yet though these restrictions severely winnow 
down the possible abodes of life in the universe, we 
cannot resist the conclusion that life, though rare, 
is scattered throughout the universe. It may be 
compared to a rare plant, whose distribution is 
widespread, but of which never more than a single 
specimen is found at a time. If life is the supreme 
purpose of creation, it may be a matter for some 
surprise that its occurrence is so restricted. It 
might have been expected that every star would 
minister to life; it has, in fact, often been asserted 
that this is so. But astronomy gives no support to 
this view. The task of the astronomer is to learn 
what he can about the universe as he finds it. To 
endeavour to understand the purpose behind it and 
to explain why the universe is built as it is, rather 
than on some different pattern which might have 
accorded better with our expectations, is a more 
difficult task; for this the astronomer is no better 
qualified than anybody else. 



INDEX 



Absolute zero of temperature, 54 

Absorption of light, by Earth's at- 
mosphere, 64, 66; by planet's at- 
mosphere, 68 

Absorption spectrum, 63 

Adams, 166 

Adel, 141, 166, 167 

Age of Earth, 238, 241 ; of stars, 
235, 241 

Alcohol, 46 

Amino acids, 37 

Amino group, 36 

Ammonia, 28, 49; in atmospheres of 
Jupiter and Saturn, 139, 148 

Analysis of light, 23 

Angular momentum, 215, 218, 229, 
233; conservation of, 215 

Annihilation of matter, 238 

Antoniadi, 162, 191 

Argon, discovery of, 82; in Earth's 
atmosphere, 93 

Arrhenius, 206 

Atmosphere of Earth, 45, 78; of 
planets, 53; composition of, 79; 
weight of, 84; addition of helium 
to, 85; loss of hydrogen and 
helium from, 88; primitive, 88; 
of Mercury, 117; of major planets, 
1 35 ; of major planets, constitution 
of, 142; of major planets, evolu- 
tion of, 143; of Venus, 154; of 
Mars, 202 

Atmosphere, rate of loss of, 60 

Atom building, 238, 240 

Atoms, 22; numbers of, 22; vibra- 
tions of, 23; nature of, 25; valency 
of, 28; metastable, 87 

Aurora borealis, 84, 86; non-polar, 
86 

Barnard, 191, 193 
Beginning of time, 242 
Black body, 71 
Bolometer, 75, in 
Boron oxide, 40 

British Astronomical Association, 
125, 19* 



Calcium, 29 

Callisto, 104, 120 

Canals of Mars, 177, 179, 190; 
doubling of, 180, 185, 194; 
nature of, 187, 195; appearance 
of, 192 

Candle power of stars, 6 

Canopus, 248 

Carbohydrates, 31, 38, 43 

Carbon, 27 

Carbon dioxide, 45; in atmosphere 
of Earth, 45, 79, 95; absorbed by 
vegetation, 99 ; in primitive 
atmospheres of major planets, 
146; in atmosphere of Venus, 
1 66 

Carbonic acid, 43 

Carbon monoxide, 49 

Carbon tetrachloride, 31 

Carboxyl group, 36 

Cassini, 175 

Caustic soda, 29 

Chains of carbon atoms, 35 

Chamberlin, 221 

Chemical energy, 44 

Chlorine, 28, 49 

Chloroform, 31 

Chlorophyll, 44 

Clouds on Venus, 156, 158, 165; on 
Mars, 198 

Collisions of molecules, 56 ; of stars, 
235> 243 

Colloidal state, 39 

Colour of Venus, 158; of Jupiter, 
128, 150; of Uranus and Neptune, 
132, 139; of Mars, 183, 191 

202 

Composition of Sun, 89-94; f 

Earth, 89-94 
Copernicus, 117 
Craters, lunar, 107 
Cyanogen, 40 



Depletion of oxygen from Earth's 

atmosphere, 98 
Di-chlor-methane, 31 



255 



256 INDEX 

Distance of Moon, 105; of stars, 4; 
of spiral nebulae, 14, 18; of Mer- 
cury, 116; of Jupiter, 122; of 
Venus, 1 52 ; of Mars, 1 72 

Distribution of stellar universes, 19 

Dunham, 140, 166 



Earth, age of, 238; velocity of escape 
from, 78; atmosphere of, 79; 
mean density of, 139 

Eclipse of Moon, 112 

Electron, 24, 238 

Energy from Sun, 42; from oxida- 
tion, 45; from fermentation, 47; 
from annihilation of matter, 239; 
from atom building, 240 

Equipartition of energy, 55 

Equivalent atmosphere, 84 

Europa, 104, 120 

Expanding universe, 241 



Fats, 31, 35 
Fatty acids, 35 
Fermentation, 47 
Formic acid, 44 
Fraunhofer lines, 63 



Galileo, 154, 175 

Ganymede, 104, 120 

Gas, 53 

Giant stars, 7 

Glycerine, 35 

Great Meteor Grater, 106 



Hay, W., 130 

Helium, 23, 82, 137, 240; in at- 
mosphere of Earth, 79; in at- 
mosphere of major planets, 1 38 

Helium atoms, 25 

Helmholtz, 50 

Herschel, i, 2, 3, 4, 7, 13, 43, 130, 
176 

Hesperus, 153 

Hooke, 127 

Huggins, 138 



Hydrogen, in Sun and Earth, 92; 
solid, on major planets, 137; in 
atmosphere of major planets, 
138, H9 

Hydrogen atom, 25 

Hydroxyl group, 34 

Infra-red sensitive plates, 157, 197 
lo, 104, 1 20 

Island Universes, 13, 14, 241, 244; 
distances of, 14 

Jeans, 12, 60, 223, 22& 235 

Jeffreys, 135, 227 

Jupiter, 104, 122; satellites of, 104; 
distance, 122; telescopic appear- 
ance, 122; belts of, 123, 150; 
rotation, 123; evidence of at- 
mosphere, 124; currents in at- 
mosphere of, 125; Red Spot on, 
127, 150; South Tropical Dis- 
turbance on, 128, 150; colours, 
128; temperature, 129, 149; 
mean density, 134; ice coating, 
135; atmosphere, 135; spectrum, 
138; constitution of atmosphere, 
142 

Kant, 215, 216 

Keeler, 131 

Kelvin, 238 

Kinetic theory of gases, 54, 60 

Krypton, 82 

Laplace, 216, 217, 219, 220 

Life, conditions required for, 40-49; 
origin of, 49; not possible on 
Moon, 113; not possible on 
Mercury, 120; not possible on 
major planets, 151; improbabi- 
lity of, on Venus, 170; probability 
of, on Mars, 207 ; possibility of, in 
other planetary systems, 247; 
infrequency of, 249 

Light of night-sky, 86 

Light-year, 5 

Living matter, 31-40 



Lowell, 181-189, 191* *93> *94> 1 95> 

205 
Lyttleton, 232 



Mars, 103; velocity of escape from, 
103, 173; satellites, 104; distance 
1 72 ; oppositions of, 1 72 ; size and 
weight, 173; phases, 175; tele- 
scopic ^ appearance, 175; rotation, 
175; polar caps, 176, 183, 196, 
201; surface markings, 176; seas, 
177, 182; canals, 177, 179, 187, 
190, 195; colour, and changes of, 
183, 191 ; vegetation on, 183, 186, 
206; water- vapour on, 196; evi- 
dence of atmosphere, 197; extent 
of atmosphere, 198; clouds, 198; 
constitution of atmosphere, 202; 
temperature, 203; possibility of 
life on, 207 

Marsh-gas, see Methane 

Maxwell, 131, 217 

Mercury, 11, 1 03 ; velocity of escape 
from, 103; temperature, 103, 117; 
distance, 1 1 6 ; same face of, 
turned to Sun, 1 1 6 ; atmosphere, 
117, 1 1 8; surface markings, 1 18; 
transits of, 119; devoid of life, 
120 

Metals, most abundant, in Sun and 
Earth, 90 

Meteorites, 90 

Methane, 28, 30; in atmospheres of 
major planets, 139, 146 

Methyl chloride, 31 

Methyl group, 31 

Milky Way, 2, 3, 8, 9; rotation of, 
i o ; mass of, 1 1 ; number of stars 
in, ii 

Molecules, 27; velocities of, 54, 56 

Moon, 102; velocity of escape from, 
102; temperature, 103, in; dis- 
tance, 105; surface features, 107; 
devoid of water, 109; devoid of 
atmosphere, no; phases, in; 
devoid of life, 112; gravitation 
of, 115; mean density, 134 

Moulton, 221 



INDEX 257 

Nebulae, 3, 8; luminous, 8; dark, 9; 
spiral, 13 

Neon, 82, 93 

Neptune, n, 132; satellite, 104; 
colour, 132; rotation, 132; varia- 
tions of brightness, 1 33 ; tempera- 
ture, 133; mean density, 134; ice 
coating, 135; atmosphere, 135; 
spectrum, 138; constitution of 
atmosphere, 142 

Neutron, 24, 122 

Nitrogen, 28; in Sun and Earth, 92; 
in primitive atmospheres of major 
planets, 143; in atmosphere of 
Venus, 1 68 

Nucleus of atom, 24 

Number of stars, 1 1 ; of universes, 18 



Occultations, no 

Oppositions of Mars, 1 72 

Origin of life, 49 

Origin of solar system : Kant's hy- 
pothesis, 215; Laplace's hypo- 
thesis, 216; collisional theories, 
219; plane tesimal theory, 221; 
Jeans' theory, 223; Jeffreys 1 
theory, 227; Lyttleton's theory, 
232 

Oxidation, 38, 45 

Oxygen, 28; needed for life, 46; 
absorptions produced by, 66; 
in Earth's atmosphere,, 79, 98; 
metastable atoms of, 87; in Sun 
and Earth, 94; produced by 
vegetation, 100; on Mars, 202, 
207 

Ozone, 64 



Pasteurisation, 41 

Peek, 151 

Phillips, 125, 126 

Phosphorus, 153 

Photocatylist, 44 

Pickering, 182, 195 

Planetary systems, frequency of 

occurrence, 234, 247 
Planetesimal theory, 221 



INDEX 



Pluto, 214, 218 

Polar caps on Mars, 176, 183, 

196; nature of, 200; thickness of, 

201 

Positron, 24 
Pressure of gas, 53 
Primitive atmosphere of Earth, 88 
Procyon, 248 
Proteins, 31, 36 
Proton, 24, 238 
Pulsating stars, 5, 10, 14 
Pulsating universe, 246 
Pythagoras, 153 



Ramsay, 82 

Rate of loss of atmosphere, 60 

Rayleigh, 82, 86 

Rays, lunar, 109 

Recession of external universes, 1 5, 
241, 245 

Red Spot on Jupiter, 127, 150 

Reduction, 38 

Rings, Saturn's, 131, 217; rotation 
of, 131 

Rotation of Milky Way system, 10; 
of spiral nebulae, 1 3 ; of Mercury, 
116; of Jupiter, 123, 126; of 
Saturn, 130; of Uranus, 132; of 
Neptune, 132; of Venus, 159, 
162 

Russell, 232 



Salt, 28 

Satellites, 104 

Saturn, 104, 122; satellites, 104; 
telescopic appearance, 129; belts 
on, 129, 150; spots on, 130; rota- 
tion of, 130; temperature of, 131, 
149; rings, 131, 217; mean den- 
sity, 134; ice coating, 135, at- 
mosphere, 135; spectrum, 138; 
constitution of atmosphere, 142 

Schiaparelli, 118, 176-181 

Sedimentary deposits, 98 

Shooting stars, 84, 114 

Silicon, 27 



Silicon fluoride, 40 

Slipher, 139, 140, 141, 166, 167, 202 

Sodium, 28, 150 

Solar system, regularities in, 213; 
Kant's hypothesis, 215; Laplace's 
hypothesis, 216; collisional the- 
ories, 219; planetesimal theory, 
221 ; Jeans' theory, 223; Jeffreys' 
theory, 227; Lyttle ton's theory, 
232 

South Tropical Disturbance, 128 

Spectroscope, 62 

Spectrum, 24, 62 

Spiral nebulas, 13; recession of, 15, 
241, 245; distances of, 18; 
number of, 19 

Stars, measurement of distances of, 
4; pulsating, 5, 10; candle-power, 
6; giant, 7 ; number in Milky Way 
system, 1 1 ; distance apart, 1 2 ; 
temperatures, 43; age of, 235; 
internal temperatures, 249 

Stefan, 71 

Stellar energy, source of, 238 

Sugar, 34, 46 

Sun, temperature of, 40; rotation of, 
125 

Sunlight, energy from, 38 

Sunspots, temperature of, 40 

Swedenborg, 214 



Temperature, absolute zero of, 54; 
of Sun, 40; effect on living matter, 
41 ; of stars, 43; effect on molecu- 
lar velocities, 54; of Moon, 1 1 1 ; 
of Mercury, 117; of Jupiter, 1 29 ; 
of Uranus, 133; of Neptune, 133; 
of Venus, 163; of Mars, 203 

Temperature, internal, of Sun, 239 

Temperatures of planets, 70; how 
estimated, 71 ; how measured, 75; 
comparison between estimated 
and measured values, 76 

Thermocouple, 75, in 

Tidal friction, 106, 159 

Time scale, 251 

Titan, 104 

Titanium oxide, 40 



Transits of Mercury, 119, 156; of 

Venus, 1 1 9, 155 
Travers, 82 
Tri-chlor-methane, 31 



Ultra-violet light, 64 
Universe, HerscheFs picture of, 2, 
7; position of Sun in, 8; island, 

*3 

Uranus, 122, 132; discovery of, i; 
satellites, 104; colour, 132; belts, 
132; rotation, 132; temperature, 
133; mean density, 134; ice 
coating, 135; atmosphere, 135; 
spectrum, 138; constitution of 
atmosphere, 142 



Valency, 28 

Vegetation, on the Earth, 99; 

probable absence on Venus, 169; 

on Mars, 183, 186, 206, 250 
Velocity of escape, 57-61, 102, 154 
Velocities of molecules, 54 



INDEX 259 

Venus, distance, 152; transits, 119, 
155; phases, 153; size, 154; velo- 
city of escape from, 154; atmo- 
sphere, 1 54 ; telescopic appearance, 
156; markings on, 156; colour, 
158; clouds on, 158; rotation, 
I 59i temperature, 163, 170; 
oxygen and water-vapour not de- 
tected in atmosphere of, 164; 
carbon-dioxide in atmosphere of, 
1 66 

Water, needed for life, 48 

Waterfield, 191 

Water-vapour, absorptions pro- 
duced by, 66; in Earth's atmo- 
sphere, 83; on Mars, 196, 202 

Wave-length of light, 64 

Wildt, 135, 139, 152 

Williams, 124, 126 

Wright, T., 215 

Wright, W. H., 197 

Xenon, 79, 83